Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (269 trang)

Tieng Anh 6 Sach moi Giao an ca nam

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (2.58 MB, 269 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Ngày soạn : 12/ 8/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 19/ 8/ 2013
<b>Period 1: Unit 1: My new school</b>


<b>Lesson 1: Getting Started </b>
I. Teaching points:


- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand “ A special day”, review vocabs about school
things.


- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
<b>II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.</b>


III. Teaching steps.


<b>Teacher and Students </b> <b>Board & contents</b>
<b>Warm up</b>


(Network)


-Have Ss work in 2 teams


-Get Ss to write down vocabs about school
things.


-Give feed back and decide which is the
winner of the game.


-Provide some more vocabs about school things.



<b> A. WARM UP. (Network)</b>
<i> ruler</i>


-Present new words.


- Check: Rub out and Remember.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>* Vocabulary</b>


- excited (adj): hào hứng


- calculator (n): máy tính
- uniform (n): đồng phục


- smart (adj): thông minh


- put on = wear: mang, mặc, đội.
<b>1. Listen and Read</b>


? Look at the picture.
What is Phong doing?
Who are Vy and Duy?
Where are they going?
Why is it a special day?


- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to do
the true, false exercise.


-Get them to read aloud the answers.


-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.
-Give feed back.


- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to
find the expression.


1.oh dear. 2. You’ll see
3. come in 4. Sure


<b>1.Listen & Read</b>


<b>a. *Answers: 1T</b>
2T
3F
4T
5F
<b>b. *Answers: </b>


1.oh dear: Express surprise (negative)
2. You’ll see: “ You’ll find out”


3. come in: invite sb in
School


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud.


- Correct some.


-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the


poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask
qs to check Ss’ understanding of the poem.
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their
partner then read the poem aloud.


- Listen &correct


- Ask Ss to match the words with the school
things.


- Let ss listen and read.


- Explain some words if necessary.


4. Sure: “yes”/ alright.
<b>c. Example:</b>


A: Oh dear. I forgot my calculator.
B: That’s OK, you can borrow mine.
A: Thank you.


<b>2. Poem.</b>
<i><b>Example.</b></i>


Khanh is going back to school today
His friends…….


<b>3. Matching.</b>
Answer key:



1. b- pencil sharpener 6. i- pecil case
2. e- compass 7. f- notebook
3. j- school bag 8. a- bicycle
4. d- rubber 9. g- ruler
5. c- calculator 10.h- textbook


- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out
the things and say out the words, make up


sentences with the words if there is time.
-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their
vocabulary book.


<b>C. CONSOLIDATION</b>


<b>Homework</b>


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 13/ 8/ 2013



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b> Lesson 2: A closer look 1</b>
<b> I. Teaching points: </b>


- Review vocabularies.


- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ou/ and /A/
<b>II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.</b>


<b>III. Teaching steps.</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
Have Ss work in 2 teams


-Get them to write the subjects they have
learnt.


-Give feed back


A. WARM UP
Math


English


-Play the recording and let ss listen.
-Play again and pause for them to repeat
each word.


-Ss repead- read



-Correct pronunciation.


-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1
into groups.


- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms.


-Check the answer. Explain to them
which words go with each verb.


-Tell Ss to do the task individually.
-Then call some ss to write on the board.
-Correct their mistakes.


-Ask Ss to write sentences about


B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.


<b>1. Listen and repeat the words.</b>
Physic exercises
English vocabulary
History football
Home work lessons
Judo music


School lunch science
<b>2. Put the words into groups.</b>


play do have study



Football
music


Homewo
rk


Judo
exercises


School
lunch
lessons


Physics
English
History
Vocabs
science
<b>3. Put one of these words in each blank.</b>


<i> lesson football</i>
<i> science</i> <i> judo</i>
<i> homework</i>


1. I do……with my friend, Vy.
2. Duy plays….for the school team.
3. All the…. new school are interesting.
4. they are healthy. They do….every day.
5. I study maths, English and…..on


Mondays.


<i><b>Key. 1. homework 2. football</b></i>
3. lessons 4. judo
5. science


<b>4. Write sentences about yourself using </b>
<b>the combination above.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

themselves in their notebooks, using
combination above.


- Ss write as many sentences as posible.
-Go around the class and correct some.


<i><b>Eg: I/ We have English lessons on </b></i>
<i>Tuesday and Thursday.</i>


<i>………</i>


-Let Ss practice the sounds /ou/ and /A/
together. Ask Ss to observe the T’s lip
positions for these two sounds.


-Ss look at the T’s lip position and listen
and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen
and repeat.


- Ss listen and repeat as many times as


posible.


-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to
work individually.


- Ss work in individual then check their
answer in groups.


-Call some to write the answers on the
board .


-Give feed back.


Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat
sentence by sentence. Help them to
recognize the two sounds then underline
them in the sentences.


II. PRONUNCIATION
<b>5. Listen and repeat</b>


1. /əʊ/ :judo going homework
<i><b>open</b></i>


2. /ʌ/: brother Monday mother month


<b>6. Listen to the words and put them into</b>
<b>two groups.</b>


Key.



<i>/</i>əʊ<i>/</i> <i>/</i>ʌ<i>/</i>


Rode
Don’t
Hope
Homework
post


Some
Monday
Month
Come
one


<b>7. Listen and repeat. Underline the </b>
<b>sounds / ʊə / and / ʌ / you hear.</b>
<b>Home work</b>


-Summarize the main points of the
lesson.


-Assign home work.


<b>C. HOMEWORK.</b>


-Learn by heart new words.


-Practice the sounds /əʊ<i>/ and /</i>ʌ<i>/.</i>
-Do Ex…in Ex book.



<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 15/ 8/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 22/ 8/ 2013
<b>Period 3: Unit 1 : My new school</b>


Lesson 3: A closer look 2
<b>I. Teaching points: </b>


- Review Present simple and Present continuous tenses.


- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses
<b>II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write


sentences.


-correct, give marks.


A. OLD LESSON


Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.


Eg: I play football for the school team.


-Introduce “Miss Nguyet is interviewing
Duy for the school newsletter. Write the
correct form of the verbs.”


-Let Ss do the task individually in 5
minutes.


- Correct their answer. Or give
explaination if necessary.


-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the
interview.


-Observe and help ss when and where
necessary.


-Correct Ss’pronunciation & verb form.


-Let Ss read the example to understand
the task.


-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their
notebooks, refering to the interview.
-Go around to help.


-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board.
-Check their answer sentence by


sentence.


- Then ask ss to give the rule and use of
the present simple themselves.


- Give more examples.
1. I always walk to school.
2. He always walks to school.
3. We don’t like playing football.
4. She doesn’t like playing football.
- Ss work in pairs. Take turns to ask
questions and give answers.


-Go round and correct mistakes or give


<b>B. NEW LESSON.</b>


<b>I. Review the present simple.</b>


<b>Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.</b>
<i><b>* Key.</b></i>


1. has 2. Do you have
3. love 4. Does Vy walk
5. ride 6. teaches


7. doesn’t play 8. reads
9. go 10. do



<b>Ex2.Role-play the interview.</b>


<b>Ex3. Correct sentences.</b>
<i><b>Eg: </b></i>


Duy’s new school has a small playground.
- Duy’s new school has a large playground.
<i><b>Key:</b></i>


1. Duy lives near here.


2. Duy likes/ loves his new school.
3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.


5. At break time, Phong reads in the library.
GRAMMAR:


<b>The present simple.</b>


Form: (+) S(I, You, We, They) + V
S(She, He, It) + Vs/es
(-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V
(?) Do/ Does + S + V ?


<b>Use: Something often happens or fixed.</b>
<b>Ex4: Make questions then interview.</b>
1.You/ ride your bicycle / to school.
-Do you ride your bicycle to school?
2. You/ read/ in the library/ at break time.


3. You/ like your new school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

help when necessary. 5. You/ do your home work/ after school.


-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in
getting started. And find out the verbs
used in the present continuous tense.
-Write on the board.


-Ask Ss to study the example first then
do the exercices.


- Correct.


-Ask them to say the differences
between the two tenses.


-Ask Ss to do the task in pairs.
-Call some to give their answers.
- correct their mistakes and explain
why…


-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.


<b>II. Review the present continuous.</b>


<b>Ex5. Underline the present continuous in </b>
<b>Getting started.</b>


Eg: is knocking…, is having…, are


<i>wearing…</i>


GRAMMAR. The present continuous.
<b>Form: </b>


(+) S + am/is/are + V-ing.
(-) S + am/is/are not + V-ing
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + V-ing?


<b>Use :Something is happening now.</b>
<b>Ex6: Complete the sentences with the </b>
<b>correct form of the verbs.</b>


<b>Eg: -Yummy! I (have)...school lunch with </b>
my new friends.


-Yummy! I am having school lunch with
<i>my new friends.</i>


1. I am not playing football now. I’m tired.
2. Shh! They are studying in the library.
3. Duy and Phong aren’t doing their
homework.


4. Now I am having an English lesson with
Mr Lee.


5. Phong, Vy and Duy are riding their
bicycles to school now.



<i>Something often happens or fixed: The </i>
<i>present simple </i>


<i>Something is happening now: the present </i>
<i>continuous</i>


<b>Ex7: Choose the correct tense of the verbs.</b>
1. My family have/ are having dinner now.
2. Mai wears/ is wearing her uniform on
Mondays and Saturdays.


3. The school year in Vietnam starts/ is
stating on Seps 5th


4. Now Duong watches/ is watching Ice Age
on Video.


5. Look! The girls kip/ are skipping in the
school yard.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

-Summarize the main points of the
lesson.


-Guide Ss to do home work.


<b>C. HOME WORK</b>


1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two
tenses.



2. Do Ex8 at home:


-Underline things that often happen or are
fixed.


-then underline things that are happening.
-Compare Vy’s first week with yours.
<b>Eg: + Both Vy and I are having an </b>
<i>interesting first week.</i>


<i> + I wear uniform every day but Vy wears </i>
<i>uniform only on Mondays and Saterdays.</i>
<i> + ….</i>


3. New lesson: Communication.
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 19/ 8/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 26/ 8/ 2013
<b>Period 4: Unit 1: My new school</b>


<b>Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION</b>
<b>I.Teaching points: </b>


-To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about making friends and


how a good friend is.


<b>II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.</b>
<b>III. teaching steps.</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
<b>Warm up</b>


<i>Hang man</i>


Have Ss play the game


-Get them to listen to the eliciting and


A. WARM- UP
<i>Hangman</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

guess the word


<i>-Ss try to find out the letter building </i>
the word.


-T gives feed back and decide which
is the winner of the game.


 excited


(2) <b> (3)</b>
(4) (5)



(6) (7)
<b></b>


Pre--Present new words. Tell Ss that these
vocabs will appear in the task that
follow.


-Ss listen and answer to find out
the meaning of the words.


-note down.


Have Ss play game: ROR


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>


-pocket money: tiền tiêu vặt
-share (v): chia se
-help (v): giúp đơ
-remember (v): nhơ


-classmate: bạn cùng lơp


<b>While </b>


-- Ask some Ss how they often make
friends, what they often say when they
first meet a new friend. What question
they often ask….



- Ss listen and answer.


- Let Ss read and tick the questions
individually.


-Then ask them to discuss in group.
-Go round and ask why or why not they
ticked this or that question.


-Allow Ss some time to write questions
on a piece of paper, share them with the
class or group.


- Ask Ss to give qualities of a good
friend in class (adjective).
- Ss give as many words as possible.
-Divide the class into groups of 4or 5 .
- Ss take turns to interview the other
members, using the questions.


- Encourage Ss to give nice sentences
about friendship.


<b>2.Game : </b>


<b>Ask your new friends. </b>
- Are you from around here?
- Do you like pop music?



- How much pocket money do you get?
- What is your favorite subject at school?
- Are you hungry?


- Do you play football?


- How do you gat to school every day?
- Where do you go shopping?


<b>3. Friendship quiz</b>
Eg:


- friendly, generous, helpful, cheerfful,
reserved, humorous, socable, nice, polite…


Eg: “Friend are forever”
………..
<b></b>


Post--Choose some Ss to present to the class
about their good friends and why they
are good friends.


Eg:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

-Summarize the main point of the
lesson.


-Assign home work.



<b>4. Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


<b>...</b>


Ngày soạn : 20/ 8/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 27/ 8/ 2013
<b>Period 5: Unit 1: My new school </b>


<b> Lesson 5: Skill 1 - Reading</b>
<b>I. Teaching points: </b>


- To develop reading comprehension skill and to know some more new words in context:
boarding school, international school, creative students…


<b>II.Teaching aids: - Poster </b>
<b>III. teaching steps</b>


<b>Teacher & Ss</b> <b>Board & contents</b>



-Call 2 Ss to tell about their good
friends.


-Correct some and give mark.


<b>A. OLD LESSON.</b>


S1: He is Nam. He is sociable and…


<b></b>


Pre--Ask Ss to look at the three pictures


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

then give their ideas about the schools
in the pictures.


-Encourage Ss to give as many ideas
as possible.


<i><b>Eg:-In PLC Sydney school, I can see some </b></i>
girls are practicing doing something. So I think
it is a comfortable school. It is a very good
school.


-……….
<b>While </b>


-Let Ss read the three passages to
check their ideas.



-Ss do the task indidually in 5 minutes
-Note some information.


-Ask Ss to read the passages again,
then find the words in the passages.
Help Ss to understand the meaning of
the words: explaining or examples or
the Vietnamese equivalent.


-Ss should pay attention to the context
of the words.


-Ask Ss to read the text again to find
words to finish the sentences.


-Let Ss note where they found the
information that helped them complete
sentences.


-Ss can discuss and compare with their
friends.


-Correct the answer then let Ss read
aloud the sentences in chorus then in
individual.


-Check pronunciation and intonation.


<b>II. Reading</b>
<b>1. Ex1. </b>



<b>2. Ex2. What do the words mean.</b>
<b> boarding surrounded</b>
<i> international creative</i>


-It is a boarding school: many students study
and live there.


-The school is surrounded by mountains and
fields.


-…international school…for Ss from year 1 to
year 12, Ss learn English with foreign teachers.
-some creative students do drawings and


paitings in the art club.


<b>3. Ex3. Complete sentences.</b>


1. Students study and live in a…..school. They
only go home at weekend.


2. ……has an art club.


3. There are girls’ school in…..


4. Around An Lac school, there are fields and...
5. At Vinabrita School, Ss learn E with…
<b>Key:</b>



1. boarding 2. Vinabrita 3. Australia
4. mountains 5. E speaking teachers.
<b></b>


<b>Post--Allow Ss to complete the table. </b>


-Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss then
complete the table. (Ss can use the
background of the school).


-Ask some to talk to the class.


<b> III. Speaking.</b>


<b>Ex4:Which school would you like to go.</b>
<b>Name of </b>


<b>school</b>


<b>Reasons you </b>
<b>like it</b>


<b>Reasons you </b>
<b>don’t like it</b>


<b>Background of the schools.</b>


<i>-PLC Sydney: an international school for girls </i>
<i>from kindergatern to year 12 in Sydney, </i>



<i>Australia.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

-Discuss any common errors and
provide further practice.


<i>school in a mountainous region in Son Dong </i>
<i>Dist, Bac Giang Province.</i>


<i>-Vinabrita School: an international school for </i>
<i>Ss from year 1 to year 12 in Ha Noi.</i>


-Summarize the main point of the
lesson.


-Assign homework.


<b> Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new vocab
-Do exercises in work book


<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


<b>=============================================</b>



Ngày soạn : 22/ 8/ 2013
<b>Period 38: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 6: Skills 2</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick’s family are
talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.


- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.


II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the
brochure in skills 1


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<b>2. Presentation.</b>



<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday
destination


- Play the recording for the answer.
- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place </b>
<b>you know </b>


- Ask some questions to prepare the class
for the activity


<b>4. Production.</b>


- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen
places


-Check their ideas at the end


HL Bay and Hue


<b>1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s </b>
<b>.They want to go on holiday.They are </b>
<b>choosing a place from the brochure </b>
<b>above .which place do they choose?</b>
- Listen



- They go to HL BAy


<b>2. Listen again and answer the following </b>
<b>questions.</b>


1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang


2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?


3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.


4- Yes, he is
WRITING


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place you </b>
<b>know </b>


- Do you have picture or can you draw a
map of the place?


- What natural wonders are there?


- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?



- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


<b>4. In notes , fill each blank in the </b>
<b>network with the inforation about the </b>
<b>place.Then use these notes to write a </b>
<b>short paragraph about it.</b>


1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.


4- What is it like?


5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?


Ngày soạn : 29/ 8/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 5/ 9/ 2013
<b>Period 7: Unit 1: My new school</b>


<b> Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK</b>
I. Teaching points:


- Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points:
The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.


<b>II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.</b>


<b>III. Teaching steps</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
-Have Ss work in 2 teams.


-Ss write as many words as possible.


A. WARM-UP. Brainstorming.
+ calculator
School things. + compass
+ …


-Ss write the words.
- Correct mistakes.
-Repeat the words.


Ss write the answer.
-Correct


-Pay the recording twice.


-Ss listen then write words in the correct
places.


-Give correction.


B. NEW LESSON.
<b>I. Vocabs.</b>



<b>1. Match the pictures.</b>


1. dictionary 4. notebook
2. uniform 5. compass
3. pencil sharpener 6. calculator
<b>2. Match A with B.</b>


1. b
2. c
3. a
4. d


<b>3. Listen and write down the words you </b>
<b>hear.</b>


Play: sports, badminton, music.
Do: morning exercise, homework
Study: new words, geography.
Have: English lesson, a new book.


-Call on Ss to give the answers.


<b>II. Grammar.</b>


<b>4. Complete the sentences using present </b>
<b>simple.</b>


1. He comes from Da Nang.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

-Give feed back and the correct answers.


-Ss do Ex individually.


- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.


-Ss do Ex individually.


- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.


-Ss do Ex individually.


- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.


3. She walks to school with her friends.
4. I do my homework after school.
5. Mr Vo teaches physics at my school.
6. The team play football on saterday.
<b>5. Complete the sentences using present </b>
<b>continuous.</b>


1. are doing
2. are riding
3. is…studying
4. is having
5. am walking
6. is teaching



<b>6. Complete sentences with the correct </b>
<b>form of the verbs.</b>


1. lives
2. is
3. has


4. is walking
5. go


6. study


7. are working
8. loves


<b>III. Communication</b>


<b>7. Match the questions with the </b>
<b>answers.</b>


b- g d- f e- a h- g
<b>8. Role-play. </b>


-Ask Ss to write their dream school at home
-Divide the class into 3 groups.


-Ask Ss to use the pictures and their
imagination.



<b>C. PROJECT</b>


<i><b>Your dream school</b></i>


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


<b>D. HOMEWORK.</b>


-Learn by heart new words.


-Prepare new lesson: Unit 2 – Getting
Started.


<b>* Adjustment:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

Ngày soạn : 28/ 8/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 5/ 9/ 2013
<b>Period 8: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson 1: Getting started </b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:


- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.


- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My house".
<b>II. Content:</b>



- Vocab: house lexical items.


- Grammar: +Prepositions of place and: “there is/ there isn’t/ there are/ there aren’t .”
<b>III. Preparations:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work


- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.


<b>IV. Procedures:</b>


<b> Teacher’s activities</b> <b> Students’ activities</b>
<b>I. Warm up </b>


- Teacher writes on the board: “ My home ”
and ask what “home” means to them.


- T. writes their answer on the board.


- T. explains it can be the house or
apartment where you live or can refer to a
family living together.


- Listen and answer individually.


<b>I. Presentation </b>
<b>1. New words.</b>



<b>- Teacher uses different techniques to teach</b>
vocab (situation, realia)


- T. reads the new words and ss. repeat .
- Checking vocab: Slap the board


<b> * Set the scene:</b>


- Ask ss to look at the picture on page 30.
? What are Mi and Nick doing?


? Where are they?


Apartment (n) căn hộ
Cousin (n) anh, em họ
living room (n) phòng khách
bedroom (n) phòng ngủ
kitchen (n) phòng bếp
bathroom (n) phòng tắm
- Read in chorus.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

-We are going to listen and read a dialogue
between Mi and Nick. They are talking on
skype = a system that allows you to make
telephone call using your computer


<i><b>2. Listen and read</b></i>


a).T. plays the recording the first time then
ask ss to the family members Mi talks


about.


? - Ss listen the second time and check the
answers.


b)- Allow ss to read the conversation again
and complete the sentences.


- Teacher gets feedback.


- look at the picture on page 30.
- They are playing computer.
playing games
using the internet.
- They are in their house/ room.


- Listen and give the answers.


<b>- Listen and check the correct answers.</b>
Grandparent


s


Uncle


Dad V Aunt V


Mum V Cousin V


Brother V



- Work independently then share answer
with their partner.


1: TV- sofa 4: noisy


<b>II. Preposition </b>


<i><b>1.Prepositions of place ?</b></i>


? Ask ss if they know the preposition in the
box.


? Have ss do this exercise in pairs.


<i><b>2. Ask ss to write the sentences</b></i>
individually then call 6 ss to write their
answer on the board


<i><b>3. –Explain some new words.</b></i>
Pillow (n): cái gối


Cap (n) : cái mũ
Mouse (n): con chuột


Let ss to look at the picture of the room and
do ex.4 in pairs.


-Ask ss to correct the false sentences.



2: town house 5: three
3: sitting on the sofa


C: behind G: under
D: in


<b>- Work individually.</b>
<b>Key:</b>


1. F. The dog is between the bookshelf
and the bed.


3. F. The clock is between the pictures.
4. F. The cat is in front of the
computer.


5. F. The cap is next to the pillow.


<i><b>4. Have ss look at the picture again and</b></i>
answer the questions.


- Answer the questions.


<b>Key: 1. They are on the desk and the</b>
bookshelf


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>III. Consolidation .</b>


? What is the topic of the lesson today?
<b>V. Homework </b>



?Write ex.5 in the notebook.
? Do exercises in the workboook.
? Prepare: Closer Look 1


2. They are on the floor.
3. Yes. It is


4. No. they are on the bed
5. It’s behind the bookshelf.


6. No, it isn’t. It’s next to the desk.
<b>- Answer individually.</b>


- Take note.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


<b>=============================================</b>


Ngày soạn : 2/ 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 9/ 9/ 2013
<b>Period 9: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson 2: A closer look 1 </b>
<b>I.Objectives</b>



- Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.


- Ss read the conversation between Mi and Nick again ,understand it then complete the
sentence.


-Using the prepositions of place: in/on/behind/in front of/ between, behind, under/ next to.
<b>II. Preparations.</b>


-Teacher: Extra boards.


-Students: Prepare the new words, practice pronouncing these words
<b>III. Procedures.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1.Warm up. – To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


- Play a game : T asks Ss to draw their
house with their imagination, don’t care of
the beauty.(1 minute)-One student goes to
the board and draws, then name the rooms


<b>*VOCABULARY</b>


<b>/ Play a game : Drawing. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

of the house.



- T checks with the whole class.
<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T asks Ss to work in groups of 8 .T write
the name of the rooms on the board, in
different places.


<b>3.Practice</b>




Ss in each group choose the number for
their group<sub></sub> go to their group , discuss and
run to the board as fast as he/she could to
write the name of things.


-T tell the Ss which group is win.
-The whole class listen to the tape and
repeat the words they hear.


-T can model this activity with a student.
Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some pairs to
practice in front of the class.


-Have some Ss read out the words first.
Then play the recording for them to listen
and repeat the words.


-T gives the way to pronounce these words
in 3 ways.



<b>4.Production.</b>


<b>-Ss do this exercise individually first then </b>
compare their answers with a partner.(One
student goes to the board and write)


- T guides the way to do ,and asks Ss to
practice.


<b>5. Homework.</b>


-Learn by heart the new words. Write 3
lines for each new word.


-Prepare the new lesson: Check dictionary
these words: wall, a ceiling fan.


<i><b>EX2.Name the things in each room in 1.</b></i>
1.living room: lamp, sofa…


2. bedroom: bed, lamp, picture…
3.kitchen:fridge,cupboard…
4.bathroom: bath, sink, toilet
5.hall: picture


<i><b>EX3. Listen and repeat the words.</b></i>


<i><b>EX4.In pairs, ask and answer questions </b></i>
<i><b>to guess the room.</b></i>



T: What’s in the room?


Oanh: A sofa and a television.
T: Is it the living room?


Oanh: Yes.


<b>*/ PRONUNCIATION. /Z/ ; /S/; /IZ/</b>
<i><b>EX5+6. Listen and repeat the words. Then put </b></i>
the words in the correct column.


/z/ /s/ /iz/
posters


tables,
beds,
wardrobes


lamps,
sinks,
toilets


fridges


<i><b>EX7. Read the conversation below.</b></i>


<i><b>Underline the final s/es in the words and </b></i>
<i><b>write / z /; /s/; /iz/ </b></i>



<i><b>/z/ : things, pictures</b></i>
<i><b>/s/: lights, chopsticks</b></i>
<i><b>/IZ/ dishes, vases.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


<b>=============================================</b>


Ngày soạn : 9/ 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 16/ 9/ 2013
<b>Period 10: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson 2: A closer look 2</b>
<b>I.Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :


- review the structures THERE IS / ARE…….. to make sentenses.
- to discribe a room in a house.


<b>II. Content</b>


<i><b>1. Vocabulary</b></i>


Ceiling fan, cupboard, cooker , ceiling light


<i><b>2. Structures</b></i>


There is/isn’t a picture in the wall.
There are/ aren’t two lamps in the room
Is there a picture in the wall?


Are there two lamps in the room?
<b>III. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work


<b>- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities


<b>IV. Procedures.</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>1.Warmmer. - Play agame : Brainstorming</b>


Divide the class into two groups. Call each
student in each group to go to the board to
write words in turn in 2 mins. Which group
having more words is the winner


- Group work:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Living room


- T gives remarks and marks for the winner.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>


<b>1. Presentation (10')</b>
<b>Vocabulary:</b>


Ceiling fan (n)


cupboard(n) ( use pictures to present )
cooker (n)


ceiling light (n) (real thing)


<b><+>Checking: *Rubout and remember</b>
Teacher prepares two pictures of two rooms
with some furniture removed from the second.
Ask Ss to look at the two pictures and
introduce the new structures:


<b>Singular: </b>


<i><b> 1</b><b>st</b><b><sub> picture: There is a picture in the wall.</sub></b></i>
<i><b>2</b><b>nd</b><b><sub> picture: There isn’t a picture in the wall.</sub></b></i>
<i><b>Plural: </b></i>


<i><b>1</b><b>st</b><b><sub> picture: There are two lamps in the room</sub></b></i>
<i><b>2</b><b>nd</b></i> <i><sub>picture: There aren’t two lamps in the</sub></i>
<i><b>room</b></i>


<i><b>Yes/No question:</b></i>



<i><b> Is there a sofa in the first picture?</b></i>
<i><b> -Yes, there is ( No, there isn’t)</b></i>


<i><b> Are there any lamps in the second</b></i>
<i><b>picture?</b></i>


<i><b> - Yes, there are (no, there aren’t)</b></i>
<i><b>2. Practice:</b></i>


Divide the class into 4 groups then guide each
group to do their activities,


Group 1 does exercise number 1: Write is or
<i><b>are in each sentense.</b></i>


Group 2 does exercise number 2:Write isn’t or


Listen and write words in the note
book.


Ceiling fan (n) quạt trần
Cupboard (n) tủ bếp
cooker (n) nồi cơm điện
ceiling light (n) đèn trần


Look at the pictures and make
sentences about the two ones.


Write down.



Do exercises in group.
Ex1+2


Key: 1- is/isn’t 2- are/aren’t
3- are/aren’t 4- is/isn’t
5- are/aren’t


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<i><b>aren’t into each sentence.</b></i>


Group 3 does exercise number 3:Write
positive sentences


Group 4 does exercise number 3: Write
negative sentences.


Call Ss in each group to practice.
<i><b>Exercise 4:</b></i>


Let Ss look at the picture and complete the
description about the kitchen in Mi’s house (p
<i><b>38)</b></i>


- Call two students to read the text.
<b>Exercise 5</b>


Have Ss do this exercise individualy, then give
the T the answers.


<b>Exercise 6: Ask Ss to work in pairs then call</b>


some Ss to report their partner’s answer to the
class


Ex 3:


There is/isn’t a TV next to /on the table.
There is/isn’t a brown dog in the


kitchen.
…………


There are/aren’t lamps in the bedroom.
Complete the description:


<i><b> Answer key: </b></i>


<i><b>1- is 2- is 3- are 4- are </b></i>
<i><b>5-aren’t 6- isn’t </b></i>


Individual work
<b>Example: </b>


Are there two bathrooms in your
house?


Pair work
<b>Example: </b>


Are there two bathrooms in your
house?



Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
<b>Production:</b>


<b>Exercise 7</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs:


Teacher can model the conversation with a
Student before Ss do this in pairs.


Where’s your room?


What’s your favorite room?
Is there fridge in your room?


Are there two lamps in your room?
Ask a good Ss to summarize their partners to
the whole class.


<b>Example: </b>


I live in a small house in the city with my
parents and my sister. There are 5 rooms in my
house: a living room, a kitchen, a bathroom
and two bed rooms. I like my room best. There
is a ceiling light and .... There isn’t a ceiling
fan ...


Work in pair



My room is on the second floor
It’s my bedroom.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the</b>
work book and make sentenses with new
words.


Describe the room you like best.


Prepare a new lesson : Communication


Do assigments.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : / 9/ 2013
Ngày dạy: / 9/ 2013
<b>Period 11: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson : Communication</b>
<b>I.Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :


- review the grammar points: W-H questions (where/howmany…), there is/there are,


preposition of place.


- discribe any rooms as well as houses.
<b>II. Content</b>


<i><b>1. Vocabulary</b></i>


Town house, countryhouse, villa, stilt house, apartment.


<i><b>2. Structures: Review present simple and structures: There is/ are……</b></i>
+ Where does Mi live? – She lives in a town house.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>III. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work


<b>- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities


<b>IV. Procedures.</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>I. Warmmer</b>


Chatting:


- Where do you live?


- Do you live in a big or small house?



- How many rooms are there in your house?
- Is there a garden in your house?


- Are there large windows in your room?
- Which room do you like best?


Individual work
Answer:


<b>II. Presentation (15')</b>
<b>1- Pre- speaking</b>
<b> Extra vocabulary</b>


-Have Ss guess the meaning of the vocabulary
and tell Ss that this vocabulary will apear in
the tasks that follow.


Town house:
Country house:


Villa (using pictrues to present)
Stilt house


Apartment = flat


-Ask Ss to look at the pictures about Mi’s
grandparents’house and complete the
sentenses.



Play a game:-Devide the class into 4 groups of
8 students. Let them complete the text in turn.
Which group doing the most quickly and
having most correct answers is the winner.
- Let a good Ss descrbe Mi’s
grandparents’house.


T gives remarks and marks.
<i><b>2- While- speaking:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of Nick’s house


Write new words into the notebooks
Town house: nhà ở phố


Country house: nhà ở nông thôn
Villa biệt thự


Stilt house nhà sàn
Apartment = flat căn hộ


Group work
<i><b>Exercise 1:</b></i>


Answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

and Mi’s house on page 25 to find the
difference between the two houses in pairs
which has the most differences will be the
winner



T looks at Nick’s house and models with a
student


-Nick lives in a country house. Where
does Mi live?


-How many rooms are there in Mi’s
house?


……….


Ask Ss to work in pair not to look at each
other’s picture and make similar
conversations.


Call a good St to describe Mi’s house.


Give Ss 5- 7 minutes to draw a simple plan of
the house on page 40. Then ask them to work
in pair to tell each other about their house
<i><b>3- Post – speaking:</b></i>


Call some Ss to describe their friends house to
the class.


Let Ss correct their friends’ mistakes.
Give remarks and marks


Work in pairs to find the difference


between Nick’s house and Mi’s house
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>


Nick’s house Mi’s house
- Small big


- A country house a town house
- trees no trees


- two windows many windows
………


St: (look at Mi’s house)
- She lives in a town house.


- There are 6 rooms. What about Nick’s
house? How many rooms are there?
………


Work in pairs


Individual work
<i><b>Exercise 3</b></i>


Draw the house and then practice in pair
to tell the own house.


<i><b>Exercise 4 </b></i>


- Individual work.


- correct the mistakes
<b>III. Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the</b>


work book and make sentenses with new
words.


Describe your house.


Prepare a new lesson : Skill 1


Do assigments at home.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


<b>=============================================</b>


Ngày soạn : / 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: / 9/ 2013
<b>Period 12: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson : Skills 1 </b>


<b> </b>
<b>I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: </b>


 Read for specific information about rooms and houses.


 Ask about and describe houses, rooms, and furniture.
<b>II. Contents:</b>


- Vocab: home lexical items:


- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are


<b>III. Preparations:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books and projector.
- group work, individual work


<b>IV.Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>A. Warm up</b>


- Ask student to draw a simple plan of their
house and call some students to describe
their friend’s house to the class


- Students work in individual then go to
the board to describe their friend’s house


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. Reading</b>


<b>1. Pre – reading</b>



- Ask students to look at the pictures and the
title on page 22 then decide what is the topic
of the text


-Ask students to look at the text but not to
read it then answer the questions


1- What type of text is it?


2- What is the title of this page? What is the
topic?


3- Write three things you know about
Da Lat


- Confirm the answer to question 1 and 2


- Look at the pictures and the title on page
22 then think about the topic of the text
- Quickly look at the text and answer
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

1. It’s an email


2. The title is “A room at the Crazy House
Hotel, Dalat ”. The topic is Nick’s weekend
at the Crazy House Hotel.


<b>2. While – listening:</b>



-Ask students to read the text again and the
questions


<i>1. Is Nick with his brother and sister?</i>
<i>2. How many rooms are there in the hotel?</i>
<i>3.Why is the room called the Tiger room?</i>
<i>4. Where is his bag?</i>


- Tell the class to underline parts of the
e-mail that help them with the answers


( Set a strick time limit to ensure Ss read the
information quickly)


- Ask Ss to give evidence when giving the
answers


- Feedback and give the key
<i>1. No, he isn’t</i>


<i>2. There are ten rooms</i>


<i>3. Because there is a big tiger on the wall</i>
<i>4. It’s under the bed</i>


<b>3. Post – reading:</b>


-Ask Ss to do exercise 4 then compare their
answer



- Check their answer then give the key
A window, a lamp, a tiger, a shelf, a desk


ideas


- Read the text in detail to answer the
questions


-Compare their answers with
their partners


- Copy the correct answer


- Find the things in the room
- Compare their answer with their


partner


- Check and correct their answer
<b>II. Speaking.</b>


<b>1.Pre- speaking:</b>


- Ask Ss to answer the question: What is
there in your rooms?


<b>2.While - speaking:</b>


- Ask each Ss to create a new room for the
hotel and draw a plan of the room



- Ask each Ss to show the plan to their
partner and describe their room in pairs
<b>3.Post - speaking</b>


- Ask three students to show their partner’s
plan to the whole class and describe it
- Ask Ss to choose the best plan


- Work in pair to answer the question
There is a bed , ...


-Think about a new room for the hotel and
draw a plan of the room


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Vote for the best plan
<b>C. HOMEWORK.</b>


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.


- Create a new room for your house
And describe it


-Prepare new lesson: Skill 2
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>



Ngày soạn : 1 / 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 2 / 9/ 2013
<b>Period 13: Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Lesson 2: Skill 2 </b>


<b> </b>
<b>I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: </b>


- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.


- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My home ".
- write an e-mail to a friend.


<b>II. Contents:</b>


- Vocab: home lexical items:


- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are


<b>III. Preparations:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work


<b>IV.Procedures</b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>A. Warm up</b>


- give some home lexical items and ask ss
to put them into suitable groups: lamp,
bed, cupboard,dishwasher,shower, table,
chairs, ceiling fan, sink, television,
picture, cooker.


- Students work in groups then go to the board and
write ( a word can be used more than once)


<i>living</i>
<i>room</i>


<i>bedroo</i>
<i>m</i>


<i>kitchen</i> <i>bathroo</i>
<i>m</i>
table


....


bed
...


cupboard
...



sink
...
<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>


<b>I. Listening</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>Vocabulary:</b>


fireplace (n) ( use pictures to present )
wardrobe (n)


<b>? Look at the picture in your books! Ask</b>
<i>and answer about the things in the</i>
<i>picture</i>


<b>2. Pre – listening:</b>
* Set the sence:


<i>Nick’s mother are on holiday. They are</i>
<i>describing their room at the hotel. </i>


<b>Prediction:? Before you listen to their</b>
<i>description, I want you to guess where</i>
<i>each thing is.</i>


* some key words / phrases in the tape
script:


. actually ( adv): thùc sù
. far corner: gãc xa



. right in front of: ngay phÝa tríc
<b>3. While – listening:</b>


- play the tape script


-correct their drawing.
<b>4. Post – listening:</b>


-let ss practice speaking by describing the
room.


-remark and give ss marks


- look at the pictures and give the meanings
of new words.


- copy and practice reading 2 new words.
- What is this ?


+ It’s a table.


-hang the poster of the room.


-students go to the board and stick a piece of
paper of thing on the poster.


- copy


-practice reading



-listen to the tape script for the first time
-check their prediction


-listen to the tape script for the second time
to draw the furniture in the correct place.


-begin with: This is a big room in the
<i>hotel...</i>


<i>( there is a big fireplace near the door. The </i>
<i>shelves are right in front of the window...)</i>
<b>II. Writing.</b>


<b>1.Pre-writing:</b>


Show ss a sample of an e-mail ( use
Nick’s e-mail as an sample), then give
questions:


+ How many part are there in an e-mail?
+ What are they?


+ What should we write in each part?
-give ss the form of an e -mail


-Hang the poster of Writing tip on the
board.


-Ss study the Writing tip and may ask



+ There are 5 parts.


+ They are : the subject line, greeting,
introduction, body and conclusion ( students
can answer this question in Vietnamese)
<i><b>+( Students’ answers )</b></i>


<i>+ give some ways of asking about his / her </i>
health.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

some information.
<b>2.While -writing:</b>


- ask ss to look at Nick’s e-mail again to
identify the subject, greeting,


introduction, body and conclusion
- Give the correction.


-ask ss to correct the e-mail to Nick, focus
on the puntuation and capitalisation rules
ss learnt in unit 1.


- correct.


<b>2.While -writing: Write an e-mail to </b>
<i>Nick,telling him about your idea for the </i>
<i>new room of the Crazy House Hotel.</i>
-Explain the precess of writing which ss


have to follow:


+ P (plan): Brainstorm vocabulary about
+ D (draft)


+ C (check) : check dictation, puntuation,
capitalisation, parts.


-Tell Ss to pay attention to punctuation,
structural elements, linking words…


+ Subject: weekend away!
+ Greeting: Hi Phong


+ Introduction: How are you ...
+ Body : Da lat is nice... at home
+ Conclusion: See you soon!


+ Ss work in pairs then go to the borad and
write their answers.


+ write in the notebooks.
+ read Mi’s e-mail again.


-listen and copy


-work in groups ( if less time, ss can work at
home)


(students’ work)



-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.


<b>C. HOMEWORK</b>


-Finish an e-mail to Nick.


-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………..</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b> </b>


<i>Preparing date: 22 / 8/ /2013</i>
<b>Unit 2: MY HOME</b>


<b> Period 15: Looking back </b>


<b>I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: </b>
- Ss revise the grammar points:


+ prepositions of place
+ There is / are...
+ home lexical items


- practice writing and speaking by asking and describing a room, a house …


<b>II. Contents:</b>


- Vocab: home lexical items:


- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are


<b>III. Preparations:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, pictures and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work


<b>IV.Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>A. WARM-UP</b>


- use exercise 1 in the page 46 to warm up
-have Ss work in 2 teams.


-ss work in groups.


-go to the board and write their answers


<i>Types of building</i> <i>Rooms</i> <i>Furniture</i>
Villa,apartments,


town house, stilt
house, country



Living
room,
hall, atlic,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

-correct and give remark


-Group competition game: let ss in two team
add more words to each group. The group
that can add more word to the list and finish
first in the winner.


<i>+ Types of building: cottage, hotel,...</i>
<i>+ Rooms: dinning room, rest room, </i>
guestroom, reeding room(hall)...
<i>+ Furniture: stool, clock...</i>


house bedroom,


kitchen


drawers,
wardrobe,
sofa,


dishwasher,
desk


<b>B. NEW LESSON.</b>


<b>* Set the sence: You have revised </b>



<i>vocabulary related to the topic “ My house”</i>
<i>, but to describe a house you have to use </i>
<i>prepositions of place.</i>


-ask ss to give prepositions of place they
have learnt


<b>* exercise 2</b>


-ask ss to do exercise 2.


- Correct mistakes if necessary


<b>* exercise 3</b>


? Name the furniture in the picture and its
amount


-let ss compare their answers with their
partners.


<b> in next to</b>


beside
on



behind



- read the prepositions of place aloud.
-do exercise individually.


-write sentences in their notes then go to
the board and write one by one.


<b>Key:</b>


1.The boy is on the table.


2.The dog is in front of the kennel.


3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the
sofa.


4.The cat is behind the computer.
5.The girl is in the armchair.
6.The boy is next to the armchair.
+ a clock


+ a desk
+ many books
+ a laptop
+ a poster
+ a small plant
+ a lamp...


-give the way of using:
prepositions



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

-ask students to complete sentences using
there is / are / isn’t / aren’t


-correct
<b>* exercise 4</b>


-Ask ss to turn the sentences in exercise 3
into questions with:


Is there a.... ?
Are there ...?


-remark and give marks


<b>* exercise 5 : Write six sentences to describe</b>
your bedroom.


-correct if necessary.
<b>* Communication</b>


-ask ss to draw a cat in the house in the
book. Ask antoher st to ask questions to find
the cat.


-model the way to ask and answer.
-go around and observe ss working.
-correct if necessary


<i>There is / isn’t + singular nouns</i>
<i>There are / aren’t + plural nouns</i>



-Ss do exercise individually then compare
their answer with their partners


-go to the borad and write their answers.


Make questions abd answers:
-Is there a clock on the wall?
+ Yes, there is.


-Are there two small plants in the corner?
+ No, there aren’t.


-ss practice asking and answering.


-Ss do exercise individually. If possible ,
ask ss to go to the board and write their
answers.


-ss read the sample of dialogue.
-draw a cat the work in groups.


-practice asking and answering( focus on
using prepositions of place )


<b>C. HOMEWORK.</b>
-Asign home work.


-Learn by heart new words.



-Prepare new lesson: Unit 3– Getting
Started.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Ngày soạn : 30 / 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 7 / 10/ 2013
<b>Period 19: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- Reading the advertisement and Phuc’s e-mail to understand The superb summer camp.
- Training reading and speaking skills.


<b>II.Teaching aids: - Poster </b>
<b>III. teaching steps</b>


<b>Teacher & Ss</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


<i><b>- T calls 2 Ss to tell about their</b></i>
friends.


<b>A. OLD LESSON.</b>


“Describe about your friend”


-Present some new words.
-Ss repeat and copy them.
-Check ROR.


-Ask Ss to read the advertisement


and do ex 1.


-Explain any words that Ss do not
know.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. READING</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary </b>


- superb (a): tuyệt vời
- last (v): kéo dài
- attach (v): dán (nhãn)
- campfire: đêm lửu trại


- treasure: châu báu, điều quý giá.
- butter: bơ


- yet: vẫn chưa


<b>2. Choose the best answer. (Ex 1)</b>


1. The camp is for kids aged between…….
a. 6-9 b. 10-15 c. 18-19
2. The camp is in the…….


a. sea b. city park c. mountains
3. The camp last for…..days.


<b>a. three b. four c. five.</b>



-Ss quickly look at the text then
answer the questions.


- Explain the features of e-mails:
format, greeting, ending.


<b>3. Read and answer the questions.(Ex2)</b>
1. Is the text a letter, an e-mail or a blog?
2. What is the text about?


3. Is Phuc enjoying himself ?
<b>Key: 1. an e-mail</b>


2. A stay at Superb summer Camp.
3. Yes, he is.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

- Ss read the text again and decide
T or F


- Ss do the activity 4 then compare
their answers with the partner.


- T checks the answers


1. Phuc is writing to his teacher.
2. Phuc has four new friends.
3. Phuc thinks Nhung is kind.
4. Phuc likes scary stories.


5. In the evening, the kids are playing inside.


6. They are working on a milk farm tomorrow.
7. The children can speak Vnamese at the camp.
<b>Key: 1. F ( he’s writing to his parents) 2. F (He</b>
has three)


4. F (He hopes it isn’t too scary)


5. F (They are having a campfire and telling
stories)


6. F ( They are visiting a milk farm)
7. F ( They speak E only)


-Ask Ss to make their own schedule
then report their results to the class.


<b>II. SPEAKING.</b>


* Make your own English camp schedule


Morning Afternoon
Day one


Day two
Day three
-Summarize the main point of the


lesson.


-Assign home work.



<b> Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new vocab.
-Do exercises in work book.
-Prepare new lesson- Skill 2.
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 1 / 10 / 2013


Ngày dạy: 8 / 10 / 2013
<b>Period 20: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS</b>


Lesson 5: Skills 2
<b>I. Objectives </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>II. Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.</b>
<b>III. Teaching steps.</b>


<b>Teacher & Ss</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


<b>A. WARM-UP: Network</b>


<b>“Activities in a summer camp.”</b>


<b>- taking part in cooking competition</b>
- Doing “treasure hunt”


- Playing traditional games.
-….


<b>Pre</b>


-Present some new words.


-Ask Ss to look at the photos to match the
words in the box.


<b>While</b>


-Play the recording for checking and
practicing reading the words.


-Play the recording twice.


- Ss listen then fill in the table. Share their
ideas together.


- Play the recording the final time then
check their answers.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. Listening.</b>


<b>1. Vocabulary </b>



- hike : đi bộ đường dài
- ski: trượt tuyết


- research (v): nghiên cứu
- draft (v): viết nháp
- check (v): kiểm tra
- introduce (v): giơi thiệu
<b>2. Prediction. (Ex1)</b>


<b>3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)</b>
a. hiking


b. taking part in the cooking competition.
c. skiing


d. visiting a milk farm.


e. taking part in an art workshop.
f. riding a bike.


g. taking a public speaking class.
h. playing beach volleyball.
i. playing traditional games.


4. Listen to Mr Lee then complete
the table.


Morning Afternoon



Day Two Doing a


treasure hunt


Visiting a
milk farm
and..(1)....
Day Three ...(2)... ...(3)...
<b>Key: </b>


<i>1. taking a public speaking class</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

-Tell the class three letters can help them
to write better: R-D-C.


-Hang the poster on the board.


-Ss study the Study Skills and may ask
some information.


-Ask Ss to use the notes below and then
guide them how to write a plan for this
weekend with their friends.


-Ss write their plans.


- Go around and Correct some


<b>II. Writing.</b>
<i><b>1. Study Skills.</b></i>



<b>Research, draft, check</b>


<b>Research: Make notes and brainstorm ideas.</b>
Find or draw pictures to add to your writing.
<b>Draft: Then write the first draft.</b>


<b>Check: Check your draft. Can you improve</b>
it? Write it out again.


<i><b>2. </b><b>Practice. </b></i>
<b>* Activity 4</b>


<b>+ Introduce yourself;</b>


Decribe yourself – think about your
appearance and personality.


<b>+ Describe your friends</b>


Write about your friends – think about the
appearance and personality.


<b>+ Describe your plans:</b>


What do you plan to do together this
weekend?


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.



<b>C. HOMEWORK</b>


-Learn by heart new words
-Finish the plans at home.


-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 3 / 9/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 10 / 10/ 2013
<b>Period 21: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS</b>


Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK
<b> </b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. Teaching steps


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
-Have Ss work in 3 teams.


-Ss write as many words as possible.



A. WARM-UP.


[


- Ss look at the pictures and do this exercises
T asks some Ss to write the sentences on the
board


- T checks Ss’s answers .


-Ss do this exercise individually then
compare their answers with a partner


T checks Ss’s answers


-Ss do this exercise individually then
compare their answers with a partner


T checks Ss’s answers


-Ss do this exercise individually then
compare their answers with a partner


T checks Ss’s answers


-T models the way to to ask and answer with
a student , then divide Ss into groups . Ss
work in group and take turn to draw a cat in
the house in the book . Other students ask


questions to find the cat


T goes around to observe Ss working ,
correct their mistakes and discuss them with
the whole class .


B. NEW LESSON.
<b>II. Grammar </b>


<b>* Activity 2 (individual)</b>
KEY:


1.The boy is on the table


2.The dog is in front of the kennel


3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the
sofa


4.The cat is behind the computer
5.The girl is in the armchair
6.The boy is next to the armchair
<b>*Activity 3.</b>


KEY :


1 there is 2. There are
3. There is 4. There aren’t
5. There is 6. There aren’t
* Activity 4



1. Is there a clock on the wall?


2. Are there books on the bookshelf?
3. ………?
<b>*Activity 5.</b>


<b>Eg:</b>


-There is a big clock on the wall.


-There are two pictures beside the clock.
-…..


<b>III. Communication </b>
Eg:


A: Where is the cat?
B: Is it on the bed?
A: No, it isn’t.


C: Is it under the table?
B: Yes, it is.


<b>- One of the Ss in the group asks other group</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

members question 1 and fills the information
in the following table


-This Student then summarizes their group


members’ answers and reports the results to
the whole class


<b>- Ss draw their own crazy house and tell the </b>
group about their house . Alternatively , each
group can draw a crazy house together then
tell the class about their house . The class
vote for the best crazy house . If there is no
time left , this part can be done at home as
homework


<b>*Activity 1 : </b>


<b>1. Which house do you want to live ?</b>
<b>Why ? </b>


House A B C D
Name


Reasons
*Activity 2 :


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


<b>D. HOMEWORK.</b>


-Learn by heart new words.


-Prepare new lesson: Unit 3 – Getting


Started.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 7 / 10 / 2013


Ngày dạy: 14-15 / 10/ 2013
<b>Period 22+23: Review 1</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>


<b> - Revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practised since unit 1. </b>
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>


textbook, cassette.
<b>III. Teaching steps:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final-
s/es.


Ex 1:


- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their
answers with a partner.


- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the


answer.


- T corrects and give the correct answers.
Ex 2:


- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of
school things and furniture in the house
which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The
pair that finds the most words will go to the
board and write their answers .


- Asks other to add any more words.
<b>II. Vocabulary:</b>


<b>EX 3 : </b>


- Ss do ex 3 individually


- Asks Ss to share their answers with a
partner.


- Asks Ss to come to the board and write
down the answers.


- Checks Ss’answers and give the correct
answers.


<b>EX 4: Crossword puzzle</b>


<b>- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword.</b>



<b>Ex 5: Choose the correct words.</b>
- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually.
- Ss give the correct answers.


- T corrects and give correct answers
<b>III. Grammar :</b>


- Elicits the use of the present simple and the
present continuous.


<b>Ex 6:</b>


- Asks Ss to do ex6.


* Key :


1D 2C 3C 4A 5B


/ b / : book, bag, bed ...
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...


1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Play: sports, badminton


- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.



Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter


Down : 2. dining room 4. hall


1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
4. patient 5. sporty.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board,
others do it on their notebook.


- Checks Ss’ answers
<b>Ex 7:</b>


- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand
compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.


<b>Ex 8: </b>


- Ss work in pairs to do ex8


<b>- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.</b>
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>Ex9: </b>


<b>- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.</b>



- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the
conversation


<b>IV. Skills:</b>
<b>1. Reading:</b>


- Ss do ex1,2 individually.


- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>2. Speaking:</b>


- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.


<b>3. Listening :</b>
<b>Ex 4 :</b>


- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check
their answers.



- Asks Ss to give their answers


- Gives feedback and correct answers.


1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is


6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4


Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
Ex 2 : 1. it’s in a quiet place not far from....
2. They’re hard-working and serious.
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b>Ex 5:</b>


<b>- Ss read the questions quickly.</b>


- T plays the recording again and answer the
questions


- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.


<b>4. Writing:</b>


- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.


- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board


- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board


- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
<b>* Homework :</b>


- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the test 1.


1. She’s watering the plants in the garden.
2. He’s listening to the radio


3. He’s inMi’s bedroom.
4. She’s watching TV.


- Write homework on their notebook.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 10 / 10 / 2013


Ngày ktra: 17 / 10/ 2013
<b>Period 24: Test 1</b>


<b>I. Mục đích yêu cầu:</b>
<b>1. Đọc hiểu : </b>



Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
<b>2. Viết:</b>


Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
<b>3. Nghe :</b>


Nghe đoạn văn chọn đáp án đúng / sai theo nội dung bài nghe.
<b>4. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :</b>


Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.


<b>II. Chuẩn bị :</b>
Bài photo.
<b>III. Ma trận :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b> Chủ đề</b> <b> Nhận biết</b> <b> </b>


<b>Thông</b> <b>hiểu</b>


<b> </b>


<b>Vận </b> <b>dụng</b>


<b>TNKQ</b> <b> TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b>TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b>TL</b>


<b>Language Pho</b> 4


1.0



<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>


<b>focus</b> <b>Vocab</b> 6


3.0


<b>6</b>


<b> 3.0</b>


<b>Gram</b> 4


2.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 2.0</b>


<b> Reading</b> 4



1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>


<b> Writing</b> 4



2.0
<b>4 </b>
<b> 2.0</b>


<b> Listening</b> 4


1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>
<b> Tổng</b> <b>10</b>


<b> 4.0</b>


<b>12</b>


<b> 4.0</b>


<b>4</b>


<b> 2.0</b>
<b>26</b>
<b> 10.</b>


<b>IV. Đề bài :</b>


<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:</b>



<b>Question 1: Which underlined part is pronouced differrently in each line? Choose and </b>
<b>circle A,B,C or D. ( 1p )</b>


1. A. go B. post C. come D. hope


2. A. beds B. dogs C. porters D. books


3. A. pictures B. watches C. buses D. toothbrushes


4. A. homework B. mother C. open D. judo


<b>Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )</b>
1. Kitchen is a …… in a house.


A. furniture B. room C. building
2. A clock is ……. the wall.


A. in B. at C. on


3. I ……. football every afternoon.


A. play B. do C. have


4. What’s your favourite ……. , Nam ? - Music.
A. food B. subject C. drink


5. Hai is very ……. . She always on the phone, chatting to friends.


A. talkative B. shy C. kind



6. …….. my shoes ? - They’re under the bed.


A. what B. How C. Where


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b>Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 2ps)</b>
1. She ( speak ) ……… English very well.


2. What ………you ( do) ……… now ? - I ( read ) ……… book.
3. They ( not go ) ………. to the theater this evening.


<b>Question 2: Read the text.( 1p)</b>


She’s Nga. She lives in a country house with her parents and sister . Her house is not very
big. There are 6 rooms in her house : a living room, three bedrooms, a bathroom and a


kitchen. Her bedroom is between her parents’ room and the kitchen. It’s small but she likes it.
<b>A. Read the text again and write True (T) or false (F).( 6B )</b>


1. Nga lives in a town.


2. She lives with her grandparents.
3. Her house isn’t very big.


4. Her bedroom is next to the bathroom.
<b>B. Answer the following questions: ( 6A )</b>
1. Where does Nga live ?


2. How many rooms are there in her house?
3. Is her house is very small ?



4. Does she like her house ?


<b>Question 3: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 2ps )</b>
1. is / in / there / sofa / front / a / you / of .


2. you / the / door / can / please / open ?
3. there / bookshelf / the / are / on / books ?
4. go / with / like / out / you / to / me / would ?


<b>Question 4 : Listen and write True (T) or false (F) ( 1p )</b>


Hi. My name is Susie Brewer. I’m eleven years old. I’m now in grade 6 at PLC Sysney. I like
it here, as I like to study in girl’s school. The teacher at my school are nice and very helpful,
and my favourite teacher is Mrs Susan McKeith. She teaches us maths. I have three hours to
study Vietnamese in the afternoon. Usually I do my homework at breaktime. We wear our
uniform everyday,but today we aren’t, as we are going to have an outing to Taronga Zoo.
1. Susie Brewer is 11 years old.


2. Now She is in grade 8.


3. She has three hours to study English in the afternoon.
4. She does her homework at breaktime.


<b>V. Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:</b>
<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>
<b> 1C 2D 3A 4B</b>
<b>Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>



1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C
<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>
A.


1F 2F 3T 4T
B.


1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.


3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.


<b>Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
<b>Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1T 2F 3F 4T


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>



Ngày soạn : 14/ 10/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 21/ 10/ 2013
<b>Period 25: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 1: Getting Started </b>
<b> Lost in the old town</b>


I. TEACHING POINTS:


By the end of the lesson, Ss can


<b>- Know some vocabulary about places, derections</b>
<b> - Use suguestions</b>


<b>- Read for specific information about good things in the neighbourhood</b>
<b>- Talk about different places and show directions to these in a neighbourhood. </b>
<b> II.Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.</b>


<b> II. TEACHING STEPS.</b>


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
- Look through the picture and remember


some things in it


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Kim's game ( 2 groups)


<b>Pre - teach</b>


<b>-Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about</b>
the picture


Where are Nick , Khang and Phong?
What might be happening to them? What
are they doing?


<b>II. New lesson.</b>
<b>A. Getting Started.</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

-Have you ever got lost? Where and when?
How did you feel then? What did you do?
- Elicits the new words using pictures and
explaination


<i><b> + Check vocabulary : R O R</b></i>
-Play the recording. Ss listen and


read.Pause the recording at the appropriate
places if Ss need with comprehension
questions.


-Ss work independently. Allow them to
share answers before discussing as a class.
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation
to find the phrases. Practice saying them
together( play the recording again as a


model if necessary)


_ First, model the role- play with a more
able St. Then ask pairs to role- play the
short conversations before demonstrating
the class.


- lost (a): lạc, bị lạc


- memorial (n): Đài tưởng niệm
- cathedral (n) : Nhà thờ lơn


<b>2. Listen and read: </b>


<b>1a: Read and put the actions in order</b>
KEY: 2 5 3 4 1 6


<b>1b: Making suggestions. Put the words</b>
<b>in the correcct order.</b>


KEY: 1.a.Where shall we go first?
b. Let's go to " Chua cau"
2.a. Shall we go by bicycle?
b. Ok, sure.


3.a.Shall we go by bicycle?
b. No, let's walk there.
Form: Shall we vinf....


Let's



<b>Practice:2Role play making suggestions</b>


-Ss work in groups.Ss match the picture
with the places


<b>- Correct.</b>


<b>3. Match the places below with the</b>
<b>pictures. Then listen, check and repeat</b>
<b>the works.</b>


1 E- Square: Quảng trường
2H -palace: Cung điện
3 F -cathedral: Nhà thờ lơn
4C -memorial: Đài tưởng niệm
5 G- art gallery: Triển lóm tranh
6 A- statue: Tượng


7 B -railway station: Ga tàu
8D- temple: Miếu thờ
-First, model this activities with a more


able Ss. Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some
pairs to practise in front of the class.


_ Have Ss quickly match each instruction
with the diagram. Check their answer.
Translation ( weak student)



Ask some additional questions( strong
Students)


<b> 4. Think about where you live </b>
Ex: A: Is there a theatre in your
neighbourhood?


B: Yes, There is/ No, There isn't


<b>5. Match the instructions in the box</b>
<b>with the pictures.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

- Demonstrate the game to the class first.
Ask a more able S to help. Then Ss play in
pairs


the street. 7 Cross the street.


<b>6. Game : Give your partner directions</b>
<b>to one of the places on the map, guess</b>
<b>then swap</b>


EX; A : Go straight. Take the second
turning on theleft. It's on your right.


B: Is that the art gallery?
A: Yes,it is/ No, try again
-Sumarize and review the lesson.


-Prepare closer look 1.



<b>III. Home work.</b>


Learn the new words + Do exercises
-Prepare closer look 1.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 15/ 10/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 22/ 10/ 2013
<b>Period 26: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 2: A closer look1</b>



<b> I. TEACHING POINTS </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can:


- use vocabulary and structures about people and places ( adjectives opposite)
- pronounce 2 sounds: /i:/ and /i/


<b>II. Teaching aids: </b>Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
<b>III. TEACHING STEPS.</b>


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>


- Decribe the pictures using adjectives


<b>I. Warm up</b>:


2 groups: Write the words as much as
possible.


- Elicits the new words using pictures and
explaination


<i><b>+ Check vocabulary : practice saying the </b></i>
adjectives with Ss. Then ask Ss to write
the correct adjectives in the blanks. Play
the


record as many times as reqired to allow
them to check their answers , support their


<b>II. New lesson.</b>
<b>A. Vocabulary.</b>


- narrow(a): hẹp >< wide


- Fantastic : tuyệt vời, tuyệt diệu
- convenient: tiện lợi


- polluted: bị ơ nhiểm


-peaceful: n bình, thanh tĩnh



<b>1. Fill in each blank with one word</b>
<b>from the box. Listen then check, repeat</b>
<b>the words.</b>


2. convenient 3.boring 4.polluted. 5.
historic 6.narrow 7. noisy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

pronunciation.


- Explain the contents in " Watch out!"
carefully to the Ss. T may take some more
examples to illustrate. Ask Ss to do the
vocabulary exercise individually. Check
with the whole class. When checking, ask
Ss to refer to 1 to make the meanings of
the opposites clearer to them


First model this activity with a more able
S. Remind Ss that they only use the


adjectives they have learnt in 1 and 2 to
talk about their village, town or city.Then
Ss works in pairs. Call some pairs to
practise in front of class.


<b>have two or more opposites: </b>
<b>noisy-quiet/ peaceful. some words don't have</b>
<b>opposite : polluted</b>


KEY: boring-exciting; historic-modern


noisy- quiet/peaceful.
convenient-inconvenient; fantastic-terrible.


<b>3.Work in pair...</b>


<b>Ex: A: Is your neighbourhood polluted?</b>
B: No, it isn't


A: Is it peaceful?
B: Yes, it is


- T asks some Ss to read out the words first
, then plays the recording for them to listen
and repeat the words.


- Ss listen and distinguish /i:/ and /i/


- T asks Ss to circle the words while they
listen .


- Ss compare their answers in pairs before
T checks their answers with the whole
class


-Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat
sentence by sentence. Help them to
recognize the sounds and the rhythm.
-Ss practise the chant by dividing the class
into two groups.



Have groups sing alternate lines


<b>B. Pronuciation </b>
/i:/ and /i/


<b>4. Listen and repeat.</b>


<i>exciting cheap historic sleepy </i>
<i>expensive convenient peaceful police</i>
<i> noisy friendly</i>


<i>/i:/</i> <i>/i/</i>


<i>cheap sleep </i>
<i>peaceful </i>


<i>convenient police</i>


<i> historic exciting </i>
<i>expensive noisy</i>
<i>friendly</i>


<b>5. Listen then circle the words you hear.</b>
<i><b>Key.</b></i>


1. living 7. teams
2. heat 8. chip
3. seats


4. sheep


5. tins
6. mill


<b>6. Listen and repeat the chant. Notice </b>
<b>the sounds /i:/ and /i/.</b>


-Summarize the main points of the lesson..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

-Review the lesson.
-Prepare closer look 2.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 19/ 10/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 26/ 10/ 2013
<b>Period 27: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 3: A closer look2</b>



I. TEACHING POINTS:


By the end of the lesson, Ss can focus on comparative adjective forms
<b>II. Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.</b>


II. TEACHING STEPS.



<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
- Decribe the pictures using adjectives


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


2 groups: Write the words as much as
possible.


T introduces the subject of the lesson :
comparative adjectives and give the rule.


<b>II. New lesson.</b>
<b>A. Grammar</b>


* Short adjectives: one or two syllable(s)
S1 + V + adj + er than + S2


( fast- faster; large- larger; noisy- noisier;
hot- hotter)


* Long adjectives: two, three or more
syllables


S1 + V + more adj + than + S2


( modern- more modern; expensive- more
expensive...)


REMEMBER;: Irregular adjectives


- good/ well <sub></sub> better ; bad <sub></sub> worse
- many / much <sub></sub> more little <sub></sub>less
- far <sub></sub>farther / further


<b>B.Practice:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

Ask Ss to read the instructions. Tell Ss
what they should do. Then have Ss
compair


their answers in pairs before checking with
the whole class.


- Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the
example to show ss what should do. Then
have Ss compair their answers in pairs
before checking with the whole class.
- Ask Ss to read and complete the


sentences individually. remind them to pay
attention to the number of the syllables in
each adjective. Compare their answers in
pairs before checking with the whole class.
- T elitcits . Write sentences compare the
two the neighbourhood. Compare in
pairs .then saying to the whole class.
- Feedback.


Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the
example to show ss what should do. Then


have Ss compair their answers in pairs
before checking with the whole class
-First model this activity with a more able
S. Remind Ss that they only use the


information they have written in 4 to ask
and answer questions about the two
neighbourhood.Then Ss works in pairs.
Call some pairs to practise in front of
class.


- Ask Ss think of the places that they've
been to.Model this activity with a more
able St.Then Ss works in pairs. T goes
around the class and monitors. Ask a few
pairs with the most imaginative ideas to
report them to the class.


<b>adjectives in th brackets.</b>


<b>KEY: 2. taller 3. bigger 4. noisier</b>
5.cheaper


<b>2 Now complete the following sentences</b>
<b>with the comparative form of the long</b>
<b>adjectives in brackets</b>


KEY: 2 more beautiful 3. more
convinient 4. more interesting 5 more
expensive.



<b>3. Read and complete Vy's letter to her</b>
<b>friend.</b>


KEY: 1 drier 2 smaller 3 older 4 wider
5 more delicious


6 cheaper


<b>4. Look at the pictures of Yen Binh</b>


<b>neighbourhood</b> <b>and</b> <b>LangSon</b>


<b>neighbourhood . Now write about the</b>
<b>differences.</b>


Ex: Yen Binh is more crowed than Lang
Son.


<b>5.Complete the following sentences with</b>
<b>the comparative form of the adjectives</b>
<b>in brackets</b>


KEY: 2 more expensive
3 more comfortable


4 more historic 5 narrower
<b>6.Work in pairs. ...</b>


<b>EX: A: Is Yen Binh more crowded than</b>


Lang Son?


<b>B: Yes, It is</b>


<b>A: Is Lang Son more modern than Yen</b>
Binh?


<b>B: No, it isn't.</b>


<b>7. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the</b>
<b>places that you know...</b>


Ex: Is Hue busier than Da Nang?
No , it isn't


-Summarize the main points of the lesson..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

-Review the lesson.
-Prepare comunication.
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 21/ 10/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 28/ 10/ 2013
<b>Period 28: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 4: Comunication</b>


I. TEACHING POINTS:


By the end of the lesson, Ss can :


- Listen for specific information about directions to some places in a neighbourhood.
- Talk about different places, use connective words and some expressions to give
directions to these places in the neighbourhood.


<b>II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.</b>
<b>III. TEACHING STEPS.</b>


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>


T: Show pictures to teach new words.
Ss: Have a look at the pictures and guess
the meanings of thhe new words.


-Ask Ss to write anything they know about
Hoi An.


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Brainstorming


Cao lầu
Many old houses


Chùa Cầu

World heritage An ancient town



- give some new words.


<i><b>* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b></i>


Play the recording. First,Ss to listen only.
- Play the recording again and allow Ss to
fill in the gaps as they listen.


- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs,
before playing the recording a final time to
allow the pairs to check their answers.


<b>II. New lesson.</b>
1/ New words:
- first : trươc tiên


- then : tiếp theo , rồi thì…
- after that : sau đó


- finally : cuối cùng
- to guide : hương dẫn


- be famous for : nỗi tiếng về
- direction (n): phương hương


- Sa Huynh Culture:nền văn hóa Sa Huỳnh
2/ Act1: Listen and fill in the gaps.


1. historic 2. covenient 3 straight 4 second


5.left 6 right 7 second 8 next to.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Ask Ss to read the audio guide again,
paying attention to the use of the
connective words: first(ly), second(ly),
<i>then and finally</i>


Ask Ss to read the brief information about
London and Ho Chi Minh City and look
carefully at the two simplified maps of the
two cities.


- Elicit additional information about the
two cities from Ss, then ask Ss to read the
- Ask Ss some more questions to check if
they know what they are supposed to do.
- Remind Ss of the expressions they can
use to give directions. ( Ss may refer to
the expressions in the dialogue and
exercise 5 of Getting started.)


- Have Ss prepare their audio guide
individually and then share it with
apartner.


- Ask Ss to practice presenting their audio
guide in pairs or in groups.


- Elicit information about Da Nang from
Ss.



- Ask Ss to prepare their audio guide
individually and then share it with partner.


- Have Ss present their audio guide to the
class.


<b>3/Act 2: Create an audio guide for a city</b>
instructions carefully.


Ho Chi Minh City


London


<b>4/ Act 3:Create an audio guide for Da </b>
<b>Nang City.</b>


Give the city fact file:DNCity: one of the
largest cities in VN; on the river Han,
Ngu Hanh Son Mountains, wide and clean
streets, many beautiful beaches& bridges.



-Summarize the main points of the lesson..


<b>III. Home work.</b>
- Learn the new words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>



Ngày soạn : 22/ 10/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 29/ 10/ 2013
<b>Period 29: Test correction</b>


<b>I. Nhận xét bài làm của học sinh.</b>
<b>II. Đưa ra đáp án .</b>


<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :</b>
<b>Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>
<b> 1C 2D 3A 4B</b>
<b>Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C
<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
<b>Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


A.


1F 2F 3T 4T
B.


1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.



3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.


<b>Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
<b>Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1T 2F 3F 4T


<b>Adjustments: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Ngày soạn : 22/ 10/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 2/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 30: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 4: Skills 1</b>



I. TEACHING POINTS:


By the end of the lesson, Ss can :


- read a blog for specific information about good things and bad things in a neighbourhood.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .


<b>II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.</b>
<b>III. TEACHING STEPS.</b>



<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang’s


neighbourhood is?


What do you think about it?


Do you like living there? Why? Why not?


<b>I. warm up</b>


Ss look at the picture of Khang’s
neighbourhood. Answer individually'
- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these


words in the pasage.


- T may help Ss find out the meaning of
the words in the context.


T asks Ss to read the text again and answer
the questions.


-T asks Ss to note where they found the
information that helped them to answer the
questions.


-Ss can compare their answers with their
partners.



-T corrects the answers:


<b>II. New lesson </b>
A. Reading:
<b>1. Vocabulary:</b>


Suburb (n): ngoại ô
Backyard (n): sân sau


Incredibly (adj): vô cùng, thật ngạc nhiên
Beach (n): bãi biển


(to) dislike: khơng thích
<b>2. Anwer the questions: </b>
* Key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

_ Ss scan the passage again and find the
information to complete the table.


_ Ss note where they found the
information and compare with their
partners.


_ Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
_ T checks and corrects it


sandy beaches and fine weather.
3/ They are very friendly.



4/ Because there’re many modern
buildings and offices in the city.


<b>3/ Fill in the table with the information:</b>
Like


- It’s great for outdoor activities.
- There’s almost everything here.


- Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
- People are incredibly friendly.


- The food is very good.


T reviews the expressions they can use to
give directions.


T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and
answering questions about the locations on
the map.


B.


<b> Speaking :</b>


<b>4/ Look at the map of Khang’s </b>
<b>neighbourhood and give directions:</b>
Directions:


1. Go straight on


2. Turn left ...
3. Go past…
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
6. Go along
7. Cross


T: Can you tell us the way to the
market?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

-T may model this activity with a good
student.


T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their
dialogues in front of the class.


Then take the second turning on the left.
After that go straight . It’s on your left.
<b>5/</b>


<b> Ask and answer questions about the </b>
<b>way to get to the places in your city.</b>


Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.


<b>Homework:</b>



-Practice reading comprehension a blog.
Review the lesson.


-Prepare skill 2.
<b> </b>
<b>Adjustments: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

Ngày soạn : 28/ 10/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 4/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 31: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 6: SKILLS 2</b>


<b> : </b>
I. TEACHING POINTS:


- Listening to understand the conversation between a stranger and Duy' Dad
- Writing a paragraph about what SS like or dislike their neighbour hood.
<b>II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.</b>


<b>III. TEACHING STEPS.</b>


<b>Teacher & Ss</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


<b>A. WARM-UP: Network</b>


<b>“Decribe your neighbourhood"</b>



<b>Pre</b>


-Present some new words.


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
missing words.(EX1)


Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map
carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get
the places mumbered 1-4 from the You
are here point.( Ex2)


<b>While</b>


-Play the recording for checking and
completing the missing words in the
dialogue.


-Play the recording twice.


- Ss listen choose the correct answers.
Share their ideas together.


- Play the recording the final time then
check their answers.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. Listening.</b>



<b>1. Vocabulary </b>
super market: siêu thị
cafe': cà phê


secondary school: trường cấp 2


lower secondary school : trường cấp 1
sandy: cát


office: văn phòng, cơ quan
<b>2. Prediction. (Ex1)</b>


<b>3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)</b>


1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school


<b>EX2.Choose the correct places</b>


<i>1.A 2C 3F 4D</i>


<b>II. Writing.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like
about a neighbourhood.


-Hang the poster on the board.
- Share their answers with partners


-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or


dislike about living in their


neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full
sentences and they can use abbreviations
Share with their partners. T may read out
the notes from some more able Ss to the
whole class.


- Set up the writing activity.Use their
ideas


they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm
for language necessary for writing.


? Write the first draft.then have them
write their final version.


- Go around and Correct some


T display all or some of the leaflets on the
wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T


comments.


<b>don't like about a neighbourhood.</b>
1. sandy beaches


2.heavy tracffice...


8. many shops, and markets



<i><b>2. </b><b>Practice. </b></i>


<b>* Activity 4. Make notes about your</b>
<b>neighbourhood, think about the things you</b>
<b>like or dislike about it</b>


Like Dislike


<b>* Act 5: Write a paragragh about your </b>
<b>neighbourhood saying what you like or dis </b>
<b>like about living there. Use the information </b>
<b>in 4, and Khang'blog as a model.</b>


<i>I'd like to tell you some good things and some </i>
<i>bad things about living in my neighbourhood.</i>


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.


<b>C. HOMEWORK</b>


-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
Write the final version at home.


-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
<b> </b>


<b>Adjustments: </b>



<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>Period 32: Unit 4: My neighborhood</b>


<b> Lesson 7: Looking back + Project</b>
<b>I. TEACHING POINTS: </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.


- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.


<b>II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.</b>
<b>III. TEACHING STEPS</b>


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
-Decribe in your neighbourhood


I. WARM-UP.
Group of four
- Tell Ss to write the words in their


notebooks individually and then check with
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let
them repeat the words. Check their


pronounciation.



_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and
complete them with the adjectives they have
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the


words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually
first. then they can check their answers with
a partner before discussing the answers as a
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of
their original answers so they can


use that information in their Now you
can...statements.


-T elicits the language being practiced in this
activity


II. NEW LESSON:
<b>A Vocabulary:</b>


1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
picture.


KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.


2. Activity 2


KEY


1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.


<b>B. Grammar </b>


 <b>Activity 3 KEY</b>


one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
 <b>Activity 4 KEY</b>


adj comparative form


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

-Ss read the questions and answer once or
twice( they read them aloud). Then match
them. If there is time, have them write their
notebooks.



- Ss work in pair and role play the questions
and answers .


Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak
areas and provide further practice.


polluted
exciting
large
quiet


more polluted
more exciting
larger


quieter
 <b>Activity 5 KEY</b>


1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than


4 more beautiful than


5 more expensive than


<b>C. Communication </b>


:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b



<b>:</b>*Activity 7.


Finished! Now you can..
. name places


. give directions
.use adjective to
describe places.
.compare things
-T ask ss look at the picture of two


neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the
tipical features of them.


- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their
imagination.( if have time)


D. Project


What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhood.


2. write a description of it.
- where it is


- what it has



- how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?


- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.


-Assign home work.


<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>
-Learn the new words.


-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 2/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 9/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 33: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the netural and describe them
+/ Making and



+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


-Before Ss open their books, review the
previous Unit focus on the key language
and structures learnt.


- Write the unit title on the board


“geography club ” explain the meaning of
surprise and asks Ss to guess what the
picture might be about . Let Ss open their
books and check their answers.


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T can also Ss to share any recent
experiences of going on a picnic.
Play the recording



ss listen and read.
<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation
to find the phrases


- Practice saying them together


- Pay attention to intonation when asking
questions


- Ask pairs to role-play the short


conversations before demonstrating for
the class


- Demonstrate the game to the class first.


- Ask Ss label the pictures.


<i> </i>


<i> Ask Ss questions about the picture</i>
eg: How many people are there?
What are they doing?


<b>1. Listen and read.</b>
*/ New words.
- desert | dɪˈzɜːt |



- waterfall | ˈwɔːtəfɔːl |
- valley | ˈvæli |


- island | ˈaɪlənd |


<b>a Answer the following questions</b>
1- Vy is


2- She went to the wrong room
3- Uluru


4- Australia
5- An island


<b>b.Classroomlanguage </b>
1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?


<b>c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople </b>
<b>use these sentences.Then role-play the</b>
<b>situations with a partner.</b>


<b>2. Listen and repeat the following </b>
<b>words</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1
again . tick the words you can find.
<b>4. Production.</b>



-Guide the way to do .


- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.


4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley


<b>3. Now label the pictures.</b>


1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach


9- island 10- valley


<b>4. Read the conversation in 1 again . </b>
<b>tick the words you can find.</b>


<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...


...


Ngày soạn : 5/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 12/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 34: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 2: A closer look 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack


II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.
-vocabulary
Travel items



- Discuss some of the placesin the
previous :


desert, mountain...


- Do I need a backpack in the desert?
- Why do you think so?


<b>2. Presentation.</b>
Ss listen and read.
<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with
Ss.


- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
- Clicit ideas for sentense1.


- Then allow ss to complete the remaining
sentences.


-Check their ideas at the end.


- Remind ss that in the introduce they
thought about useful things for a
beach,desert , mountain...


-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday
and they need to order the otems from
very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8)


- Practice sounding out the sound


/t/ and /st/ together


- Play the recording once and ask Ss to
number the words in the order they hear


<i> </i>


<i> - Bring some travel items</i>


ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack...


<b>1. Match theitems with the pictures then </b>
<b>practise saying the following items .</b>
*/ New words.


- plaster | ˈplɑːstə |
- painkillers | ˈpeɪnkɪlə |
- sun cream | sʌn kriːm |
- scissors | ˈsɪzəz |


- sleeping bag | ˈsliːpɪŋ bæɡ |
- backpack | ˈbækpæk |


<b>1. Match theitems with the pictures then </b>
<b>practise saying the following items .</b>
1- painkillers


2- scissors


3- plaster
4- sun cream
5- sleeping bag
6- walking boots
7- backpack
8- compass


<b>2.Complete the following sentenses</b>
1- compass


2- sun cream
3- painkills
4- backpack
5- plaster


<b>3. Now put the items in order . Number 1</b>
<b>is most useful on holiday . Number 8 is </b>
<b>the least useful.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

them.


- Play the recroding again
<b>4. Production.</b>


-Guide the way to do .


- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.



<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.


they need...


<b>4.Listen and number the words you hear.</b>
best, boat, coast, lost, boot , desert.plaster.
forest


<b>5. Listen again and repeat the words.</b>
<b>6. Listen and repeat .Pay attention to the</b>
<b>bold-typed parts of the words.</b>


- Listen and repeat


Adjustment:


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 9/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 16/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 35: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 3: A closer look 2</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>



- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative
adjectives, notice the pronunciation of comparative and superlative adjectives.


- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: can, can’t, must, mustn’t, should, should.
<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.</b>


- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T can give some famous places and asks
some questions about Mount everest, Tra Co
beach, Amazon river…


<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Choose a more able St to act as Vy, and
read the sentences to the class.


- Ss tick True(T) or False(F) in the box
provided.


- T asks Ss to stand up if they think the


sentence is True , or remain seated if they
think the sentence is False.


- Play the recording and allow Ss to check
their answers.


- Ask Ss to lookback at Vy’s sentences, find
and underline all the examples of –est.


- T asks all the students in the class do on
their bokks, except only one who go to the
board and do.


- Then T corrects if they do wrongly.


*/ Brainstorming.


List the famous places which the Ss know.
- Ha Long bay, Da Lat city, Sapa,…


<b>1.Vy is going to a quiz about wonders of </b>
<b>the world.Read the sentences and guess if</b>
<b>they are true or false.</b>


<b>2.Listen to Vy giving the answer to the </b>
<b>qiuz . check your guesses.</b>


Keys: 1.T 2.T 3.F
4.T 5.T 6.T



<b>3. Underline all the words ending in – est </b>
<b>in the quiz.</b>


1. Mount everest is the highest mountain in
the world.


2. Ba Be lake is the largest lake inVietNam.


<b>4.Complete the table with the </b>


<b>comparative and superlative adjectives</b>
good


bad
tall
long
wide
large
hot


better
worse
taller


Best
The best





<b>5. Now Vy is talking about other amazing</b>
<b>places. Complete the passage..</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

- T give the pieces of paper, and asks Ss to
work in groups and make sentences about the
place.


- T writes the example on the board , then
guides the way to do.


- T can go arround the class and help the
week students how to do.


<b>4. Production.</b>


-Guide the way to do .


- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the
new lesson.


7- highest 8- smaller



<b>6. Cut up some pieces of paper. Write the</b>
<b>names of some famous places on them.</b>
<b>- eg: </b>


“West Lake is the largest lake in HN”


<b>7. Vy givingMai some feedback . read </b>
<b>and underline the forms of must. </b>


<b>8 .Look at the classroom rules below. </b>
<b>Write.... </b>


<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 11/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 18/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 36: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 4: Communication</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn’t.


- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip


to the Himalayas.


- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.</b>


- T can use the picture of mount Everest in
the book at page 53 to ask some questions
and the Ss answer.


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T writes the newwords on the board and
asks Ss to read all the newwords to check
the pronunciation .


<b>3. Practice.</b>


- First, all of the Ss in the class read the
travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls
some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry.


- One student stands up and read the title
of activity 1. An other translates it into
Vietnamese what they are going to do.
- Ask Ss to use information in the text and
their own ideas to fill in the “ must ” and “
mustn’t ” columns.


- Create your own list and demonstrate the
activity with a more able Ss


- Then ask the class to complete the role-
play


- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.
- Check their ideas at the end


<i><b>Modal verbs </b></i>
<i><b>Must + V </b></i>


You must be careful in the garden
- T asks them to work in open pairs to
practice roling a play.


<b>4. Production.</b>


<i> </i>


- Where are they? What are they doing?
- Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
<b>1.Read the travel guide entry </b>



*/ Newwords.


- tent | tent |


- waterproof coat | ˈwɔːtəpruːf kəʊt |
- sun hat | sʌn hæt |


- diverse | daɪˈvɜːs |


<b>2.Now make a list of the things must </b>
<b>take to the Himalayas. then add things </b>
<b>you mustn’t take.</b>


Must mustn’t


compass
sun cream
painkills
backpack
plaster


shorts
t- shirt


<b>3. Role-play being a tour guide and a </b>
<b>tourist.Tell your partner what to </b>
<b>prepare for their trip to the </b>
<b>Himalayas.Try to give reasons</b>
What to prepare for their trip to the


Himalayas.


<b>-</b> Compass
<b>-</b> sun cream
<b>-</b> Painkills
<b>-</b> Backpack
<b>-</b> plaster
Example:


A: I want to go to the Himalayas.


B: OK I think you must take a waterproof
coat. It is the highest mountain in the
world. It’s cold and rainy there!
A: Yes. Anything else?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

- Guide the way to do .


- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.


<b>4. Perform your Role-play for the class</b>
<b> </b>



<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 16/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 23/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 37: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 5: Skills 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know and understand the famous places
such as : Ha Long Bay and Hue City. .


- Review the comparatives and supperatives.


- Newwords: essential, traditional, central, attraction, cuisine.
- Skill: Reading.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.</b>


- T asks Ss to look at the pictures at page
54 and make predictions about the text.


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T writes the newwords on the
blackboard.


<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ss read the newwords in chorus. Notice
the pronunciation.


- T corrects if they pronounce wrongly.
- Ask ss to find the four words in the
passages and underline them.


- Check their meaning.


- Ask ss to read the sentences then write
true or false .


- Answer the following questions.


- Then ask the class to complete the role-
play.


Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.
- Check their ideas at the end.



- Discuss with Ss which things they find
interesting /uninteresting about HL Bay
and Hue


<i> </i>


1. Where is the passage from?
2. What is it about ?


3. What do you know about the subject?
<b>1.Before you Read .Look at the picture </b>
<b>below and make prediction about the </b>
<b>text. Then read and check your ideas.</b>
1- HaLong bay and Hue


2- places
3- I ...


*/ Newwords


- essential | ɪˈsenʃl |
- traditional | trəˈdɪʃnəl |
- central | ˈsentrəl |
- attraction | əˈtrækʃn |
- cuisine | kwɪˈziːn |


<b>2. Find these words in the passages in 1 .</b>
<b>then check the meaning.</b>


Essential , activities , attaction , cuisine


<b>3. Read the following sentenses.then </b>
<b>tickT or F</b>


1. In HL Bay some of the island look like
people or animals.


1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F 5 T
<b>4. Now answer the following questions</b>
1- HL Bay in Quang Ninh


2. You must take a boat ride.


3.A visit to the imperial City is more
important.


4.Bacause people travel there just for the
food.


<b>SPEAKING</b>


<b>5. Work in pairs. Make notes about ona </b>
<b>of the places in the brochure. use the </b>
<b>information in the text and your own </b>
<b>ideas.</b>


- Tuan Chau is the biggest island in HL
Bay


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

- Ask Ss to close their book
divide ss into A and B.



- Tell group A to describe HL Bay.
- Tell group B to describe Hue.
<b>4. Production.</b>


- Tell the class they are ivsiting in your
hometown


- Ask Ss to suggest some advice
- Use must /mustn’t


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.


- Traditional dance


<b>6. Tell your partner about the place.</b>


<b>7. Your friends are visiting your town. </b>
<b>Think about what they must and </b>
<b>mustn’t do while they are there. role- </b>
<b>play the conversation in group.</b>


a- Things they must do/bring:
b: Things they mustn’t do/bring:


<b>Adjustment:</b>



...
...
...


=================================


Ngày soạn : 18/ 11/ 2013


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b> Lesson 6: Skills 2</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick’s family are
talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.


- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.


II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the


brochure in skills 1


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday
destination


- Play the recording for the answer.
- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place </b>
<b>you know </b>


- Ask some questions to prepare the class
for the activity


<i> </i>


<i> -Ask Ss to recall the two places in the </i>
brochure in skills 1


HL Bay and Hue


<b>1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s </b>
<b>.They want to go on holiday.They are </b>
<b>choosing a place from the brochure </b>
<b>above .which place do they choose?</b>


- Listen


- They go to HL BAy


<b>2. Listen again and answer the following </b>
<b>questions.</b>


1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang


2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?


3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.


4- Yes, he is
WRITING


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place you </b>
<b>know </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>4. Production.</b>


- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen
places


-Check their ideas at the end



<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.


map of the place?


- What natural wonders are there?


- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?


- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


<b>4. In notes , fill each blank in the </b>
<b>network with the inforation about the </b>
<b>place.Then use these notes to write a </b>
<b>short paragraph about it.</b>


1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?


3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?


5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?


<b>Adjustment:</b>



...
...
...


=================================


Ngày soạn : 19/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 26/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 39: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.


- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.


* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
-Decribe in your neighbourhood


I. WARM-UP.
Group of four
- Tell Ss to write the words in their


notebooks individually and then check with
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let


them repeat the words. Check their


pronounciation.


_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and
complete them with the adjectives they have
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the


words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually
first. then they can check their answers with
a partner before discussing the answers as a
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of
their original answers so they can


use that information in their Now you
can...statements.


-T elicits the language being practiced in this
activity


II. NEW LESSON:
<b>A Vocabulary:</b>


1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
picture.



KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.


2. Activity 2
KEY


1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.


<b>B. Grammar </b>


 <b>Activity 3 KEY</b>


one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
 <b>Activity 4 KEY</b>


adj comparative form



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

-Ss read the questions and answer once or
twice( they read them aloud). Then match
them. If there is time, have them write their
notebooks.


- Ss work in pair and role play the questions
and answers .


Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak
areas and provide further practice.


exciting more exciting
 <b>Activity 5 KEY</b>


1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than


4 more beautiful than


5 more expensive than


<b>C. Communication </b>
:*Activity 6.


KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
<b>:</b>*Activity 7.


Finished! Now you can..
. name places



. give directions
.use adjective to
describe places.
.compare things
-T ask ss look at the picture of two


neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the
tipical features of them.


- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their
imagination.( if have time)


D. Project


What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhood.


2. write a description of it.
- where it is / what it has


- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.


<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>


-Learn the new words.


-Compare some things in your school.
-Make a description.


<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...


Ngày soạn : 19/ 11/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 26/ 11/ 2013
<b>Period 39: Revision</b>


<b>I . Objectives:</b>


- Ss revise what they have learnt in unit 4 and unit 5
<b>II. Contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>-</b> Modal verb: must
<b>III. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
<b>I. Pronunciation:</b>


- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final- /
<i>i: / and / I / ; / t / and / st /</i>


<b>III. Grammar :</b>



- Elicits the use of the present simple and the
present continuous.


<b>Ex 6:</b>


- Asks Ss to do ex6.


- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board,
others do it on their notebook.


- Checks Ss’ answers
<b>Ex 7:</b>


- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand
compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.


<b>Ex 8: </b>


- Ss work in pairs to do ex8


<b>- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.</b>
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>Ex9: </b>


<b>- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.</b>



- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the
conversation


<b>IV. Skills:</b>
<b>1. Reading:</b>


- Ss do ex1,2 individually.


- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>2. Speaking:</b>


- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.


* Key :


1D 2C 3C 4A 5B


/ b / : book, bag, bed ...
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...


1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo



- Play: sports, badminton
- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.


Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter


Down : 2. dining room 4. hall


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.


<b>3. Listening :</b>
<b>Ex 4 :</b>


- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check
their answers.


- Asks Ss to give their answers


- Gives feedback and correct answers.
<b>Ex 5:</b>


<b>- Ss read the questions quickly.</b>


- T plays the recording again and answer the
questions



- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
<b>4. Writing:</b>


- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.


- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board


- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
<b>* Homework :</b>


- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the test 2.


1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not
going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping
5.is


1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is
6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4


Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
Ex 2 : 1. it’s in a quiet place not far from....
2. They’re hard-working and serious.
...



- Write homework on their notebook.
<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


Ngày soạn : 26 / 11 / 2013
Ngày ktra: 2 / 12 / 2013
<b>Period 41 : Test 2</b>


<b>I. Mục đích yêu cầu:</b>
<b>1. Đọc hiểu : </b>


Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
<b>2. Viết:</b>


Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
<b>3. Nghe :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b>4. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :</b>


Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.


<b>II. Chuẩn bị :</b>
Bài photo.
<b>III. Ma trận :</b>



<b> Cấp độ tư duy</b> <b> Tổng</b>


<b> Chủ đề</b> <b> Nhận biết</b> <b> Thông hiểu</b> <b> Vận dụng</b>


<b>TNKQ</b> <b> TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b>TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b>TL</b>


<b>Language Pho</b> 4


1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>


<b>focus</b> <b>Vocab</b> 6


3.0


<b>6</b>


<b> 3.0</b>


<b>Gram</b> 4


1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 2.0</b>



<b> Reading</b> 6


1.5


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>


<b> Writing</b> 4


2.0
<b>4 </b>
<b> 2.0</b>


<b> Listening</b> 4


1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>
<b> Tổng</b> <b>10</b>


<b> 4.0</b>


<b>12</b>


<b> 4.0</b>


<b>4</b>



<b> 2.0</b>
<b>26</b>
<b> 10.</b>


<b>IV. Đề bài :</b>


<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:</b>


<b>Question 1: Circle the odd one out(1p)</b>


1. A. park B. temple C. memorial D. doctor


2. A. teaching B. morning C. working D. reading


3. A. weather B. interesting C. beautiful D. expensive


4. A. on B. of C. at D. the


<b>Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )</b>
1. There is a park in front ………. the hotel.


A. of B. on C. to D. at


2. Hoi An is so ………. .


A. boring B. historic C. terrible D. modern


3. The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. .



A. quiet B. happy C. exciting D. noisy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does
5. My head hurts. I need to take some ……. .


A. backpacks B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
6. Ayres Rock is in …….. .


A. Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain


<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN :</b>


<b>Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 1p)</b>
1. You must ( get )……….………… up early .


2. Look ! Our teacher (come)………..


3. I (go) ………..….. out to have dinner this evening.


4. ……….……. he usually (play)………..… soccer every
afternoon ?


Question 2: Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets:
a. Travelling by taxi is ……….………..……….than by bus. (expensive)
b. The Sahara is the world’s ……….………..………desert. (hot)


c. This building is ………..………… than that one (tall)


d. She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ………..………..than her sister.
(good)



e. This is the ……….……….……. film I have ever seen (bad)


f. Loan is the ………..………. student in our class. (intelligent)
<b>Question 3: Read the e-mail and answer the following questions.( 1,5ps)</b>


Dear Phong,


I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a
small hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a
supermarket and some cafés. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very
noisy here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.


In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they
are cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has
a backyard and a front yard.


Love,
Minh


1. Where is Minh staying now?


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

……….


……….
3. What are there in his neighbourhood?



………..
………..
4. Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?


………
..………


5. What are the streets in his neighbourhood like?


………
………..


6. Is the air polluted ?


<b>Question 4: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )</b>
1. modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.


=> ………..
………..


2. on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.


=> ………..
………..


3. a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?


=> ………..
………..



4. do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.


=> ………..
………..


<b>Question 5: Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1p)</b>
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?


B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?


B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)………..….. and it’s on
your left.


A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?


B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?


B: First (3)………..….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your
left.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

B: First take the third left. Then (4)……… to the end of Le Loi Street,
and it’s


on your right.
Tape script:


A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your left.



A: And where is the lower secondary school ?


B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second right and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?


B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?


B: First turn left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?


B: First take the third left. Then go to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.


<b>V. Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:</b>
<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>
<b> 1C 2D 3A 4B</b>
<b>Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C
<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
<b>Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


A.



1F 2F 3T 4T
B.


1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.


3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.


<b>Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
<b>Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1T 2F 3F 4T


<b>Adjustments: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 27/ 11/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 3/ 12/ 2013
<b>Period 42: Unit 6: </b>


<b> </b>


<b> Lesson 1: Getting started</b>


<b>I. Teaching points: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer</b>
and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.


<b>II. Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.</b>
III. Teaching steps.


<b>Teacher and Students </b> <b>Board & contents</b>


<b>Warm up. </b>


-Have Ss work in 2 groups.


- Teacher sticks the pictures of
holidays on the board and asks Ss to
match the pictures to the words phrases


-Give feed back.


<b>A.</b> <b>WARM UP.</b>


<b> Matching</b>


<i><b>1. Easter Day</b></i>
<i><b>2. Christmas Day</b></i>
<i><b>3. Thanhsgiving Day</b></i>
<i>4. New Year’s Day </i>


Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss


about the picture


- What is Phong doing ? - What is the
interview about? Holiday.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. Getting Started.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- give some new words.


<i><b>* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b></i>


Ss look at the conversation, listen to the
tape and then work in pairs to practice
the conversation.


- T asks some pairs to read the
conversation again.


- T asks Ss to read the conversation again
and answer the questions:


Ss work independently and decide if the
statements are true or false, then share
their answers with their partners.
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work
independently and decide if the


statements are true or false, then share
their answers with their partners.


- T asks Ss to work in pairs.


- Ss refers to the conversation to find the
information and fill in the blanks


<b>- Ss match the words to the picture.</b>
( individually)


-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus


- Ss look at the pictures again and find
out the pictures relating to Tet


<i><b>1. Activity 1: </b></i>


<i><b>a. Pre - teach vocabulary: </b></i>
- (to) celebrate:


- (to) decorate:
- fireworks:


- family gathering (n):
- peach blossom


- apricot blossom
- lucky money


<b>b. Listen and Read:</b>
-



a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different
times each year?


b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
c. Does Tim travel during Tet?


<i><b>2. Activity 2: T/F statements</b></i>
<b>Statements</b>
1Phong is the first person on the show
2This year, Tet is in February.


3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.


4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
5.Next, the interview will talk to a person


from Japan.


 <b>Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T </b>
<b>3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings</b>


.Feedback 2: <i>1. The end of January</i>
<i>2. house</i>


<i>3. flowers and plants</i>
<i>4. fireworks</i>


<i>5. great food ; lucky money</i>
<i>6. family gatherings</i>



<b>4. Activity 4: Matching</b>


a. Lucky money e. swimming pool
b. peach blossom


c. and apricot blosom
d. house decorations


e. Banh chung and banh tet
g. books


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

holiday.


-T asks Ss to play the game


 <b>Feedback 3: 1.b; 2.a; 3.c; 4.e; 5.h; 6.g; 7.f;</b>
<i>8.d</i>


<b>5. Activity 5: </b>


 <b>Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8</b>
<b>II. Consolidation : </b>


- T asks Ss to write down three things or
activities they like best about Tet, using I
like/love/ enjoy...’


<b>Homework</b>


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.


-Asign home work.


<b>C. HOME WORK</b>


- Learn by heart new vocabularies.
- Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)


-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>Period 43: Unit 6: </b>


<b> Lesson 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1</b>
<b> I. Teaching points: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to ‘Tet’: things,
activities.


<b>- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /ʃ/ in isolation </b>
<b>II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.</b>


<b>III. Teaching steps:</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>



- Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back


<b>I. WARM UP : </b>


<b>* Give some new words</b>


<b>Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b>


- T plays the recording and asks Ss to
listen carefully and repeat the words in
chorus and ind.


T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 to label
the pictures with the words in 1


T asks Ss to work independently
suitable nouns, then check with their
partners. T asks Ss to work
independently to match the verbs with
the suitable nouns, then check with their
partners.


<b>II. NEW LESSON: </b>
<i><b>A. Vocabulary</b></i>


<i><b>* Pre teach Vocabulary: </b></i>
- calendar


- (to) hang


- rubbbish
- should
- (to) wish
<b>1.Activity 1 </b>


<b>2. Activity 2 (pairwork)</b>


- Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h,
<i><b>8.e, 9.k, 10.c, 11.a</b></i>


<b>3. Activity 3 </b>
-


<b>Verbs</b>


lucky money e.swimming pool
peach blossom and apricot
f. house decorations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

- T asks Ss to write the phrases they
have formed in 3


T plays the recording. Ss listens
carefully first and repeat. T plays the
recording as many times as necessary.
Then asks them to write the words in the
two appropriate boxes. Check if they do
this correctly.


T asks Ss to look at the sentences first


and underline any words they think
contain the sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. After that
T plays the recording and Ss listen and
decide which sentence has /s/ and which
has /ʃ/.


- Ss compare their answers in pairs
before T checks their answers with the
whole class T asks Ss to look at the
sentences first and underline any words
they think contain the sounds /ʃ/ and /s/.
After that T plays the recording and Ss
listen and decide which sentence has /s/
and which has /ʃ/.


- T asks Ss to listen to the poem and
practice reading it.


-T asks them to pay more attention to
the key words with /s/ and /ʃ/ sounds.
Then asks some volunteers to stand up
and read the poem aloud.


<b> Feedback: 4. Activity 4:</b>


 cook special food 7. plant trees
 go to a pagoda 8. make a


wish



 give lucky money 9. hang a
calendar


 visit relatives 10. watch
fireworks


 clean the furniture 11.do the
shopping


 decorate our house 12.buy peach
blossom


<b>B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /ʃ/ </b>
<b>1. Activity 5</b>


-


<b>/ʃ/</b>


She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish Blossoms, summer, rice, celebrate,
school, speacial, spring


go to do
give buy


trees
plant
decorate


watch hang


visit
cook


clean
make


a wish
fireworks
our house
a pagoda


relatives
special food
lucky number
the shopping
peach blossoms


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>2 Activity 6 </b>
-


<b>Statements</b>
1. We come home every summer
2. We should leave early.


3. I will make a wish
4. I’m second in class.


5. My mother goes shopping every day.
6. This is a small garden.



7. Spring is coming.
 <b>Feedback: /ʃ/: 2,3,5</b>


/s/ : 1,4,6,7
<b>3. Activity 7: </b>
<b> Spring is coming!</b>


<b>Tet is coming!</b>


<b>She sells peach blossoms.</b>
<b>Her cheeks shine.</b>


<b>Her eyes smile.</b>
<b>Her smile is shy.</b>


<b>She sells peach blossoms.</b>
Summarize the main point of the lesson.


-Assign home work.


III. HOMEWORK


- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>



Ngày soạn : 2/ 12/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 9/ 12/ 2013
<b>Period 44: Unit 6 : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b> I. Teaching points: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of
intentions with ‘will’ and advice with ‘should’.


<b>II. Preparations: </b>
Posters, picturest’:


<b>III.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.</b>
<b>IV. Teaching steps.</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back.


A. WARM UP:
<i><b>Brainstorming </b></i>


Ss name the things for Tet :


Explain to them some new words.


Check: Matching ( individually)



- T asks Ss to look at the picture and
comment.


T set the scene.


T writes the sentences on the board.
answers on the board.


T checks the meaning, use and form of
the structure


T ask Ss to give out some more examples
with ‘should/ shouldn’t’


T asks Ss to look at the pictures and
complete the sentences with
‘should/shouldn’t’


<b>- T asks Ss to look at the pictures and Tet </b>
activities. Ss tick at the activities children


B. NEW LESSON.
<b>1. Presentation</b>
<b>* Pre-teach Vo:</b>


- (to) climb - (to) cheat
- (to) behave - (to) fight


- (to) break (to) make a wish


.


<i><b>Nam, you shouldn’t wet the floor. You</b></i>
<i><b>should take your raincoat</b></i>
<i><b>off first.’ </b></i>


- a. Meaning : should: nên, shouldn’t :
không nên


<b>b. Use : express advice </b>


<b>c. Form : should(n’t) + bare-inf..</b>
EX:


<b>2. Practice </b>
<b>* Activity 1: </b>


 Feedback: 1. Shouldn’t, 2. Should,


3. Shouldn’t, 4.


should
<b>* Activity 2 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2013



Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2013
<b>Period 45: Unit 6 : </b>


<i><b> Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION</b></i>
<b>I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:</b>


- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use “ must and mustn’t ” to give order.


<b>II.Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer</b>
III. teaching steps.


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups.


- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes
and try to remember as much as they
can.


- T asks the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.


- T elicits answers by asking:
-Ss write the answer on the board.


I. WARM- UP:


Make sentences:


a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is
the nicest in the world.


b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world .The
Library of Congress is the biggest in the
world.


- Give new words.


-checking: R-O- R


<b>II. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>
Tent : lều, rạp


waterproof coat : áo mưa, vải không thấm
nươc


torch: ngọn đuốc, đèn pin
map: bản đồ


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

- T asks Ss to open their books and read
quickly to check their predictions.
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss
read quickly for information.


- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work
individually ).



- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the
ideas they brainstormed to fill in their
own schedule.


- T can ask Ss to sit back and back.
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other.
- Ss can report to the class about their
partner’s schedule.


- T asks the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.


T: Give homework
Ss: Copy


Ss’ work ( pairs)


mobile phone: điện thoại di động
diverse (a):gồm nhiều loại khác nhau
<b>ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.</b>
- T asks Ss to read the sentences.


- T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the
text and answer T or F.


- Ss work individually, then compare the
answers with their partners.


<b>Modal Verbs: Show obligatory</b>


Must/ Mustn’t + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.


You mustn’t wear shorts or T-shirt when you
climb the Everest.


<b>act2. Now make a list of things you must </b>
<b>take to the Himalayas. Then add things you</b>
<b>mustn’t take.</b>


<b>MUST</b> <b>MUSTN’T</b>


Compass Go alone


Torch Shorts


Tent T-shirts


Coat


Waterproof
flashlight
Sun hat


Mobile phone
map


Ask for advice


<b>Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a </b>


<b>tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare </b>
<b>for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give </b>
<b>reasons.</b>


Ex:


A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK. I think you must take the
...because it is ...
A: Yes. Anything else?


B: ...


<b>Act4.Perform your role-play for the class. </b>
-Summarize the main point of the


lesson.


-Assign home work.


<b>III. Home work</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2013


<b>Period 46: Test correction</b>


<b>I. Nhận xét chung về bài làm của HS:</b>


- Đa số học sinh có ý thức tự làm bài, tuy nhiên kết quả cha thật tốt
- Nhiều Hs viết xấu, trình bµy bÈn.


- Nhiều em làm bài chia động từ và vit li cõu cha tt.


<b>II. áp án và thang ®iĨm chÊm</b>


<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :</b>
<b>Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>
<b> 1C 2D 3A 4B</b>
<b>Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C
<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
<b>Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


A.


1F 2F 3T 4T
B.


1. She lives in the country


2. There are 6.


3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.


<b>Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)</b>
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
<b>Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)</b>


1T 2F 3F 4T


<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2013
<b>Period 47: Unit 6: Our Tet holiday</b>


<b> Lesson : Skills 1</b>
<b>A. Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get to know New Year practices in other countries.
<b>B. Preparations : </b>


Posters, pictures.
<b>C. Procedure :</b>



<b>I. Warm up : Matching game </b>


- T asks Ss to match the flags with the countries, then match the countries with the
nationalities. (Activity 1)


<b> </b> <i><b> </b></i> <b> </b>


<b> </b>


<b> </b>


T reads the words of countries and nationalities aloud and asks Ss to repeat in chorus and ind.
-T models the way to do this with a student (Activitiy 2)


Ex: A: I’m from England.
<i>B: You’re English.</i>


Viet Nam Holland Japan the USA
Scotland Thailand Korea Australia


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- T asks Ss to hold a flag, move around the class, meet their friends and introduce where they
come from. Then their friends will tell them their nationalities.


II. New lesson :


<b>1.Pre- Reading: Activity 3 </b>


- T gives out the pictures of people in different countries celebrating New Year differently
and asks Ss to match them with the different groups of people



<i><b>Feedback: </b></i>


<i>1. The Scottish, Scotland</i> <i>3. The H’Mong, Viet Nam</i>
<i>2. The Thai, Thailand</i> <i>4. The Japanese, Japan</i>
<b>2. While-reading: </b>


<b>* Activity 4: </b>


- T asks Ss to read the four paragraphs. T helps Ss by drawing their attention to some details
from the reading and referring to the picture provided in 3. T asks to Ss to underline the verbs
and the objects to remember the information from the reading.


<i><b>Feedback: a. H’mong b. Thai c. Japanese d. Scottish</b></i>
<i><b>* Activity 5:</b></i>


- T asks Ss to find and check the meaning of some new words as they are used in the text by
matching them with the definitions.


<b>Feedback: a. feathers: the covers of a rooster, chicken or bird.</b>
<i>b. cool down: become colder</i>


<i>c. remove: take away</i>


<i>d. first footer: the first person to enter your home after New Year’s Eve. </i>
<b>3. Post Reading: </b>


- T asks Ss to work in groups to write the two fact they like best down on a piece of paper.
then they take turns to read aloud. The group decides which group of people he/she is talking
about.



<b>D. Homework </b>


- Describe your house


- Do exercises 1 ( P.12) ,2 (P.13)
<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2013


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

PERIOD Unit : OUR TET HOLIDAY
<b> Lesson 1: Getting Started </b>
<i><b> Happy newyear</b></i>


I. Teaching points:


<b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer</b>
and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.


* Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.
II. Teaching steps.


<b>Teacher and Students </b> <b>Board & contents</b>


<b>Warm up. </b>


-Have Ss work in 2 groups.



- Teacher sticks the pictures of
holidays on the board and asks Ss to
match the pictures to the words phrases


-Give feed back.


<b>B.</b> <b>WARM UP.</b>


<b> Matching</b>


<i><b>1. Easter Day</b></i>
<i><b>2. Christmas Day</b></i>
<i><b>3. Thanhsgiving Day</b></i>
<i>4. New Year’s Day </i>


Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss
about the picture


- What is Phong doing ? - What is the
interview about? Holiday.


- give some new words.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>I. Getting Started.</b>


–He’s having an interview.
It’s about Vietnamese Tet



<i><b>1. Activity 1: </b></i>


<i><b>a. Pre - teach vocabulary: </b></i>
- (to) celebrate:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<i><b>* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b></i>


Ss look at the conversation, listen to the
tape and then work in pairs to practice
the conversation.


- T asks some pairs to read the
conversation again.


- T asks Ss to read the conversation again
and answer the questions:


Ss work independently and decide if the
statements are true or false, then share
their answers with their partners.
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work
independently and decide if the


statements are true or false, then share
their answers with their partners.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs.


- Ss refers to the conversation to find the
information and fill in the blanks



<b>- Ss match the words to the picture.</b>
( individually)


-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus


- Ss look at the pictures again and find
out the pictures relating to Tet
holiday.


-T asks Ss to play the game


- fireworks:


- family gathering (n):
- peach blossom


- apricot blossom
- lucky money


<b>b. Listen and Read:</b>
-


a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different
times each year?


b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
c. Does Tim travel during Tet?


<i><b>2. Activity 2: T/F statements</b></i>
-



<b>Statements</b>
1Phong is the first person on the show
2This year, Tet is in February.


3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.


4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
5.Next, the interview will talk to a person from
Japan.


 <b>Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T </b>
<b>3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings</b>


.Feedback 2: <i>1. The end of January</i>
<i>2. house</i>


<i>3. flowers and plants</i>
<i>4. fireworks</i>


<i>5. great food ; lucky money</i>
<i>6. family gatherings</i>


<b>4. Activity 4: Matching</b>


g. Lucky money e. swimming pool
h. peach blossom


i. and apricot blosom
j. f. house decorations



k. Banh chung and banh tet g.
books


l. family gathering h.


School ground


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<i>7.f; 8.d</i>
<b>5. Activity 5: </b>


 <b>Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8</b>
<b>II. Consolidation : </b>


- .


- T asks Ss to write down three things or
activities they like best about Tet, using
I like/love/ enjoy...’


<b>. </b>
<b>Homework</b>


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


<b>C. HOME WORK</b>


- Learn by heart new vocabularies.
- Practice reading “Listen and read”


-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)


-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
PERIOD Unit 6: our tet holiday.




<b> Lesson 3: a closer look 2</b>
<b> </b>
I. Teaching points:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of intentions
with ‘will’ and advice with ‘should’.


<b>B. Preparations: Posters, picturest’: *Teaching aids: cassette, poster.</b>
III. Teaching steps.


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back.


A. WARM UP:
<i><b>Brainstorming </b></i>


Ss name the things for Tet :


Explain to them some new words.



Check: Matching ( individually)


B. NEW LESSON.
<b>1. Presentation</b>
<b>* Pre-teach Vo:</b>


- (to) climb - (to) cheat
- (to) behave - (to) fight


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

PERIOD


Unit 5: our tet holiday
Lesson 2 A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to ‘Tet’: things,
activities.


<b>- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /ʃ/ in isolation </b>
<b>*Teaching aids: cassette, poster.</b>


II. Teaching steps:


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back


<b>I. WARM UP : </b>



<b>* Give some new words</b>


<b>Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b>


- T plays the recording and asks
Ss to listen carefully and repeat
the words in chorus and ind.


T asks Ss to work in groups of 4
to label the pictures with the
words in 1


II. NEW LESSON:
<i><b>A. Vocabulary</b></i>


<i><b>* Pre teach Vocabulary: </b></i>
- calendar


- (to) hang
- rubbbish
- should
- (to) wish
<b>1.Activity 1 </b>


<b>2. Activity 2 (pairwork)</b>


- Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h, 8.e, 9.k,
<i><b>10.c, 11.a</b></i>



<b>3. Activity 3 </b>


lucky moneye.swimming pool
peach blossom and apricot
f. house decorations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

T asks Ss to work independently
suitable nouns, then check with
their partners. T asks Ss to work
independently to match the
verbs with the suitable nouns,
then check with their partners.


- T asks Ss to write the phrases
they have formed in 3


T plays the recording. Ss listens
carefully first and repeat. T
plays the recording as many
times as necessary. Then asks
them to write the words in the
two appropriate boxes. Check if
they do this correctly.


T asks Ss to look at the
sentences first and underline any
words they think contain the
sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. After that T
plays the recording and Ss listen
and decide which sentence


has /s/ and which has /ʃ/.


- Ss compare their answers in
pairs before T checks their
answers with the whole class T
asks Ss to look at the sentences
first and underline any words
they think contain the sounds /ʃ/
and /s/. After that T plays the
recording and Ss listen and
decide which sentence has /s/


-


<b>Verbs</b>


 <b>Feedback: 4. Activity 4:</b>


 cook special food 7. plant trees
 go to a pagoda 8. make a wish
 give lucky money 9. hang a calendar
 visit relatives 10. watch fireworks
 clean the furniture 11.do the shopping
 decorate our house 12.buy peach


blossom


<b>B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /ʃ/ </b>
<b>1. Activity 5</b>



-


<b>/ʃ/</b>


She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish Blossoms, summer, rice, celebrate,
school, speacial, spring


<b>2 Activity 6 </b>
-


<b>Statements</b>
8. We come home every summer
9. We should leave early.


go to do decorate
give buy <sub>plant</sub>
make <sub>clean</sub>


trees
cook visit


watch hang


special food


a pagoda


lucky number
fireworks



the furniture
a calendar
our house the shopping


peach blossoms
a wish


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

and which has /ʃ/.


- T asks Ss to listen to the poem
and practice reading it.


-T asks them to pay more
attention to the key words
with /s/ and /ʃ/ sounds. Then
asks some volunteers to stand
up and read the poem aloud.


10.I will make a wish
11.I’m second in class.


12.My mother goes shopping every day.
13.This is a small garden.


14.Spring is coming.


 <b>Feedback: /ʃ/: 2,3,5</b> /s/ :
1,4,6,7


<b>3. Activity 7: </b>


<b> Spring is coming!</b>


<b>Tet is coming!</b>


<b>She sells peach blossoms.</b>
<b>Her cheeks shine.</b>


<b>Her eyes smile.</b>
<b>Her smile is shy.</b>


<b>She sells peach blossoms.</b>


Summarize the main point of
the lesson.


-Assign home work.


III. HOMEWORK


- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2


PERIOD 36 Unit 5: natural wonders of the world
<b> Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION</b>
<b> P: </b>


T:
I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:



- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use “ must and mustn’t ” to give order.


*Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer
II. teaching steps.


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>


<b>Warm up</b>


-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups.


- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes
and try to remember as much as they
can.


- T asks the class to cover the page and


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

tell T what they remember.
- T elicits answers by asking:
-Ss write the answer on the board.


a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is
the nicest in the world.


b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world > The
Library of Congress is the biggest in the
world.



- Give new words.


-checking: R-O- R


- T asks Ss to open their books and read
quickly to check their predictions.
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss
read quickly for information.


- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work
individually ).


<b>II. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>
Tent : lều, rạp


waterproof coat : áo mưa, vải không thấm
nươc


torch: ngọn đuốc, đèn pin
map: bản đồ


sun hat: mũ, nón che nắng
mobile phone: điện thoại di động


diverse (a):/ dai’ves/ gồm nhiều loại khác
nhau


<b>ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.</b>
- T asks Ss to read the sentences.



- T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the
text and answer T or F.


- Ss work individually, then compare the
answers with their partners.


<b>Modal Verbs: Show obligatory</b>
Must/ Mustn’t + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.


You mustn’t wear shorts or T-shirt when you
climb the Everest.


<b>act2. Now make a list of things you must </b>
<b>take to the Himalayas. Then add things you</b>
<b>mustn’t take.</b>


<b>MUST</b> <b>MUSTN’T</b>


Compass Go alone


Torch Shorts


Tent T-shirts


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the
ideas they brainstormed to fill in their
own schedule.



- T can ask Ss to sit back and back.
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other.
- Ss can report to the class about their
partner’s schedule.


- T asks the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.


T: Give homework
Ss: Copy




-Ss’ work ( pairs)


Waterproof
flashlight
Sun hat


Mobile phone
map


Ask for advice


<b>Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a </b>
<b>tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare </b>
<b>for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give </b>
<b>reasons.</b>


Ex:



A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK. I think you must take the
...because it is ...
A: Yes. Anything else?


B: ...


<b>Act4.Perform your role-play for the class. </b>
-Summarize the main point of the


lesson.


-Assign home work.


<b>III. Home work</b>


- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Preparing date: 29 /11/2013


Teaching date : 1/12/2013



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Ngày soạn : 6/ 12/ 2013


Ngày dạy: 13/ 12/ 2013
<b>Period 48: Unit 6 : Our Tet holiday </b>
<b> Lesson 6: Skills 2</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what Mai and her mother will
buy for Tet and what they will buy for the people in their family.


- Write an e-mail to talk about what they should/ shouldn’t, will/ won’t buy for Tet.
- Skill: Listening and writing.


II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


- Ask Ss to recall the things in the box


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss which they will buy .
- Play the recording for the answer.



<i> </i>


- Ask Ss to recall the things in the box :
+ peach blossom.


+ banh chung.
+ clothes


<b>1Mai and her mother are going shopping</b>
<b>for Tet. Listen and tick the things they </b>
<b>will buy.</b>


- Listen


- They will buy a peach blossom,...


<b>2. Listen again and write the names of </b>
<b>things they will buy for the people in </b>
<b>column A.</b>


1- some new clothes.
2- a new tie


3- some sweets
<b>WRITING</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>3. Write an e-mail about Tet use will/ </b>
<b>won’t, should/ shouldn’t. </b>


- Ask some questions to prepare the class


for the activity


<b>4. Production.</b>


- Aska Ss some questions about their
plans for Tet


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Revision will/ won’t, should/ shouldn’t.
- Complete all the exercises in workbook
- Prepare the new lesson.


<b>from Speaking and the rest of the unit to </b>
<b>help you.</b>


- What is it ?


- What does this letter talk about?
<b>4. In notes , fill each blank in the </b>
<b>network with the inforation about the </b>
<b>place.Then use these notes to write a </b>
<b>short paragraph about it.</b>


1- How do you feel about Tet?


2- This year, what should/ shouldn’t you
do?


3- This year, what will/ won’t you do?



<b>Adjustments: </b>


<i>………...</i>
<i>………...</i>


Ngày soạn : 9/ 12/ 2013


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b> Lesson 7: Looking back</b>
I. TEACHING POINTS:


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocab related to Tet and the grammar
points: should/ shouldn’t, will/ won’t.


- They also communicate by rearranging the words to make New Year wishes and greetings.
<b>II. Teaching aids: </b>


poster, cassette.


<b>III. TEACHING STEPS</b>


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
-Decribe in your neighbourhood


I. WARM-UP.
Group of four
- Tell Ss to write the words in their


notebooks individually and then check with
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let


them repeat the words. Check their


pronounciation.


_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and
complete them with the adjectives they have
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the


words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually
first. then they can check their answers with
a partner before discussing the answers as a
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of
their original answers so they can


use that information in their Now you
can...statements.


-T elicits the language being practiced in this
activity


II. NEW LESSON:
<b>A Vocabulary:</b>


1. Activity 1: Draw lines to match the
actions on the left with the things on the
right



KEY


1. j 2.b 3. e...
2. Activity 2


KEY


1About Tet:...
2. Not about Tet
<b>B. Grammar </b>
<b>Activity 3 KEY:</b>


<b>Ss make sentences with will and won’t</b>
<b>Activity 4 KEY</b>


<b>Ss make sentences with should/ shouldn’t</b>
<b>C. Communication </b>


 <b>Activity 5 KEY</b>


1 I wish you a happy new year


2 Have a great year with your studies
3 ...


<b>:</b>*Activity 7.


Finished! Now you can..
-use the words and


phrases for Tet


-Ask and talk about Tet in
Viet Nam


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

-should/ should for advice
-ask and talk about Tet in
Viet Nam.


-T ask ss look at the picture of two


neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the
tipical features of them.


- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their
imagination.( if have time)


D. Project


Write down in a big letters the three
dreams you have for this year.


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.


<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>
-Learn the new words.
-Make a wish.



<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...


Ngày soạn : 10 / 12 / 2013


Ngày dạy: 17-21 / 12/ 2013
<b>Period 50+51: Review 2</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

textbook, cassette.
<b>III. Teaching steps:</b>


<b>Teacher & Students</b> <b>Board & contents</b>
<b>I. Pronunciation:</b>


- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final-
s/es.


Ex 1:


- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their
answers with a partner.


- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the
answer.


- T corrects and give the correct answers.


Ex 2:


- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of
school things and furniture in the house
which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The
pair that finds the most words will go to the
board and write their answers .


- Asks other to add any more words.
<b>II. Vocabulary:</b>


<b>EX 3 : </b>


- Ss do ex 3 individually


- Asks Ss to share their answers with a
partner.


- Asks Ss to come to the board and write
down the answers.


- Checks Ss’answers and give the correct
answers.


<b>EX 4: Crossword puzzle</b>


<b>- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword.</b>
<b>Ex 5: Choose the correct words.</b>
- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually.
- Ss give the correct answers.



- T corrects and give correct answers
<b>III. Grammar :</b>


- Elicits the use of the present simple and the


* Key :


1D 2C 3C 4A 5B


/ b / : book, bag, bed ...
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...


1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Play: sports, badminton


- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.


Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter


Down : 2. dining room 4. hall


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

present continuous.
<b>Ex 6:</b>


- Asks Ss to do ex6.



- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board,
others do it on their notebook.


- Checks Ss’ answers
<b>Ex 7:</b>


- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand
compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.


<b>Ex 8: </b>


- Ss work in pairs to do ex8


<b>- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.</b>
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>Ex9: </b>


<b>- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.</b>


- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the
conversation


<b>IV. Skills:</b>


<b>1. Reading:</b>


- Ss do ex1,2 individually.


- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.


<b>2. Speaking:</b>


- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.


<b>3. Listening :</b>
<b>Ex 4 :</b>


- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen


1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not
going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping
5.is


1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is


6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- Play the recording again for Ss to check
their answers.


- Asks Ss to give their answers


- Gives feedback and correct answers.
<b>Ex 5:</b>


<b>- Ss read the questions quickly.</b>


- T plays the recording again and answer the
questions


- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
<b>4. Writing:</b>


- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.


- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board


- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
<b>* Homework :</b>


- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the first term test.



kitchen – garden – living room – bedroom.


1. She’s watering the plants in the garden.
2. He’s listening to the radio


3. He’s inMi’s bedroom.
4. She’s watching TV.


- Write homework on their notebook.


<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...


Ngày soạn: 16/ 12/ 2013


Ngày dạy : 23-24- 30/ 12/ 2013
Period 52+53+54 <b>Revision</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use what they learnt to do exercise.
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>


textbook, extra-board.
<b>III. Teaching steps:</b>
- Revise :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- Asks Ss to do exercises



<b>Question I. Give the correct form of the verbs in bracket.</b>
1. What time you ( go ) to school everyday ? – I (go) at 6.30
2. Tuan (meet) you this evening ?


- He (not meet) me, his sister (meet) me.
3. He (can) draw very well.


4. Tu and his brother (go) swimming now?
- No, they (not go) swimming, they (play)
5. You mustn’t (sit) on the table.


6. She ( have) breakfast at 6.30 every morning ?
- No. She (not have) at 6.30, she (have) at 6.00.


7. I won’t (go) to Ha Noi next week, I will ( have) a party with my family.
8. Now it (be) 11 o’clock, you ( eat) lunch ?


- No, I (not eat) , I (cook)


9. There ( be ) four chairs in the kitchen ?
- No, there (not be) four, there (be) one.
10. They like ( read ) books in the library.
* Answer key :


1. do you go- go


2. Is Tuan meeting – isn’t meeting – is meeting
3. draw



4. Are … going – aren’t go – are playing.
5. sit


6. Does she have – doesn’t have – has
7. go - have


………


<b>Question II. Change the adjectives in backet into comparatives or superatives.</b>
1. This house is (tall) than that one


2. My mother cooks (good) than me.
3. This is the (interesting) I’ve seen
4. Lam is the (short) student in my group
5. Today is the (happy) day in my life.
6. This is the (good) school in my village.


7. The roads in my town are ( noisy) than in your town.
8. This bag is (bad) than that one.


9. These books are ( expensive) than those ones.
10. She is the (bad) singer in her group.


* Answer key:
1. taller


2. better


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

5. happiest
6. best


7. noisier


9. more expensive
10. worst


<b>Question III. Reorder the words to make the meaningfull sentences</b>
1. a / is/ the / there / living room / TV / in ?


2. house / next / the / my / is / to / hospital.
3. should / at / well / you / Tet / behave.
4. year / he / study / this / must / hard .


5. five / are / in / people / there / family / his.


6. statue /of / a / the / there / in / lakes / are / front / two / big.
7. we / by /shall /market / the / go / bus / to.


8. the / on / turning / take / the /third / right.
<b>* Answer key:</b>


1. Is there a Tv in the living room ?
2. My house is next to the hospital.


3. you should behave well at Tet
4. he must study hard this year.
5.there are five people in his family
…………


<b>Question IV: Complete the following sentences using the given words:</b>
have , do , play , is , study , has , are



1. she …… tall and thin. She …… black hair and a round face.
2. They …… judo very well.


3. I …….. maths on Monday and Friday.
4. We …… badminton every afternoon.
5. What …… they doing ?


6. They …….. English very well.
<b>* Answer key:</b>


<b> 1. is – has</b>
2. do
3. have
4. play
5. are
6. study
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

……….
………


……….
………


<b> HỌC KỲ II</b>

<b> (Năm học :2014-2015)</b>
Date of planning: 4/1/2015


Date of teaching: 5/1/2015



<b>Period 57 - UNIT 7: TELEVISION</b>
Lesson 1: Getting started


<b>A. Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:


+ Read the conversation again and answer the questions about the TV, use some adjectives to
describe a TV programme Ss have watched.


+ Talk about a favorite TV programme.
<b>B. Content:</b>


1. Vocabulary: channel, check, schedule…..
2. Grammar: conjunctions: so


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b> - Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities.


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Warmer (5'): Chatting</b>


- Write the words “TELEVISION” on the
board.



<b>- Who can give ideas or vocabularies </b>
relating to this topic?


- You can give vietnamese words if you
don’t know the words in English.


<b>I. Presentation (10')</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.


* Checking vocab: Recall
<i><b>2. * Set the scenes:</b></i>


? Look at the picture on page 6
? Who are they?


? What are they doing?


<i>- We are going to listen and read a </i>
<i>dialogue between Phong and Hung.</i>
<b>II. Practice (20')</b>


<b>1/ Listen and read.</b>


- Play the recording twice.



? Listen and read then check your answer
for the last question.


<b>a/ Read the conservation again and </b>
<b>answer the questions.</b>


? Run through the questions.
? Work individually.


? Share answers with your partner.
1/ What is Hung’ favourite TV
programme?


- Give ideas or vocabularies relating to
the topic


<b>1.</b> <b>1. Vocabulary:</b>


Programme(n) chương trình truyền
hình


Channel (n) kênh truyền hình
Check (v) kiểm tra


Stupid (adj) ngu ngốc
Awful (adj) kinh khủng


Schedule(n) bản chương trình
Vocab check: ROR



- Copy all the words


- Answer the questions individually.
<i>- They are Phong and Hung.</i>


<i>- They are talking about their favorite </i>
<i>programme.</i>


- Listen and read
- Check their answers


Present, run through the questions and
answer them.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

2/ What channel is Laughing out Loud on?
3/ Are Laughing out Loud and Mr Bean on
at the same time?


4/ Why doesn’t Phong like Mr Bean?
5/ What does Phong say about Tom?
- Teacher gets feedback


<b>b/ Find the adjectives describing each </b>
<b>character in the conversation and write </b>
<b>them here.</b>


Mr Bean: _______________
Tom: _______________
Jerry: _______________



<b>c/ Which adj(s) below can you use to </b>
<b>describe a TV programme you have </b>
<b>watched? What programme is it?</b>


Popular/ long/ educational/ boring/ funny/
good/ live/ entertaining.


<b>2/ Put the correct word in the box under </b>
<b>each picture.</b>


? - Ask Ss to work individually.


? - Ask them to share answers with their
partner.


- Teacher gets feedback


<b>3/ Use suitable words to complete the </b>
<b>sentences: </b>


? - Ask Ss to work individually.


? - Ask them to share answers with their
partner.


- Teacher gets feedback
1/ national
2/ comedy
3/ channels
4/ competition


5/ Cartoons
6/ educational
<b>4./ Work in group.</b>


<b>Write down two things you like about </b>
<b>television and two things you don’t like </b>
<b>about it. Talk to other in your group and</b>


2. VTV3


3. No, they aren’t.
4. Because he is awful.
5. Tom is stupid, but funny.


Find the adjectives describing each
character in the conversation and write
them.


Mr Bean: funny,awful
Tom: stupid, funny
Jerry: intelligent


Find the adjectives describing each
character in the conversation and write
them


Individual work


<b>Yes: Popular, historical, serious, long, </b>
educational, boring, funny, good, live,


entertaining.


<b>No: beautiful, small.</b>
- Ss work individually
1. national television
2. news programme
3. local television
4. comedy


5. game show


6. animal programme
- Ss work individually


- Ss share answers with their partner.


1/ national
2/ comedy
3/ channels
4/ competition
5/ Cartoons
6/ educational


- Ss work in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>see how many people share your ideas.</b>
Likes: 1._________


2. _________
Dislike:1. __________


2. __________
<b>III. Production ( 6')</b>


? Tell your friends about your favorite TV
programme.


? Why do you like it?
<b>IV. Consolidation (2')</b>


? What is the topic of the lesson today?
<b>V. Homework (2')</b>


? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 1


television and two things they don’t
like about it. Talk to other in their
group and see how many people share
their ideas.


- Ss tell their friends about their


favorite TV programme and the reason.


- Answer individually


- Take note
<b>* Adjustment:</b>



...
...
...


<b>***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***</b>
Date of planning: 4/1/2015


Date of teaching: 6/ 1/ 2015


<b>Period 58 UNIT 7: TELEVISION</b>


Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+/ Use the lexical items related to television
+/ Pronunciation /θ/ and /ð /


B. Content:


Vocabulary: MC, viewer, TV schedule, weatherman, newsreader, remote control.
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b> - Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities.


<b>D. Procedures:</b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Warmer (5'): </b>


? Look at the pictures on page 8 and answer
my questions


? Who are they and what are these?


<b>1. Warm up. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

- Introduce the new lesson.
<b>I. Vocabulary (15')</b>


<i><b>1. Teaching vocab</b></i>


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.


* Checking vocab: Slap the board


<b>1. Write the words/ phrases in the box </b>
<b>under the pictures.</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups to write the
words/ phrases in the box under the
pictures


- Play the recording and let Ss listen


? Listen and read then check your answer.
- Play it again and pause for them to repeat
each word.


- Correct their pronunciation.


<b>2. Choose a word from the box for each </b>
<b>description below.</b>


? - Ask Ss to work individually.


? - Ask them to share answers with their
partner.


- Teacher gets feedback
<b>3. Game.</b>


- Ask Ss to refer to 2 and the suggusted
structures in 3 to see how a word is defined.
- Ask Ss to work in groups to do this


exercise.


- Help SS by writing some promts on the
board so that SS can imitate.


EX:


<i>Newsreader: A person who reads news</i>
? - Ask them to share answers with other



*/ New words.


- MC (n) người dẫn chương trình.
- viewer (n) người xem ti vi


- TV schedule (n) lịch phát CT ti vi
- weatherman (n) người thông báo tin
thời tiết trên đài hoặc TV


- newsreader (n) người đọc bản tin trên
đài, truyền hình.


- remote control (n) điều khiển từ xa
- Checking vocab: Slap the board


Ss work in groups to write the words/
phrases in the box under the pictures
<b>KEY</b>


1- newsreader
2- TV schedule
3- MC


4- viewer


5- remote control
6- weatherman


- Ss work individually



- Ss share answers with their partner.
<b>KEY</b>


1- weatherman
2- newsreader
3- remote control
4- MC


5- volume button
6- TV viewer


- Listen to the teacher
- Ss work in groups


- Ss share answers with other groups.
1. newsreader: a person who reads news
2. Weatherman: a man who gives a
weather forecast


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

groups.


- Teacher gets feedback
<b>II. Pronunciation (15')</b>


- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds
/ θ / and / ð /.


? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the
sounds



<b>4. Listen and repeat the words.</b>
- Practice sounding out the sound
/ θ / and / ð / together


- Play the recording once and ask Ss to
number the words in the order they hear.
- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to
repeat.


<b>5. Which words in 4 have / θ / and which </b>
<b>words have / ð /? Listen again and write </b>
<b>them in the corect column.</b>


- Play the tape twice


? Work individually to put the words into
two groups.


? Check your answers in groups.


- Have two students write on the board.
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary.
<b>III. Production ( 6')</b>


<b>6. Tongue Twister</b>
- Play the recroding


? Ask the Ss to take turns reading the
sentence quickly and correctly.



<b>IV. Consolidation (2')</b>


? How to make the sounds / θ / and / ð /
? Find some more words that have these
two sounds


.V. Homework (2')


? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2


- Listen to the teacher


- Practice sounding out the sound
/ θ / and / ð / together


- Ss number the words in the order they
hear.


- Listen and repeat


listen again and write them in the corect
column. Then check the answer key .
<b>/ θ /: theatre, thanhsgiving, earth, </b>
anything, both, through


<b>/ ð /: there, them, neither, weatherman</b>
than, feather



- Listen and take turns reading the
sentence.


- Answer the question.


- Do as directed


<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2015

<b>Period 59</b>



<b>UNIT 7: TELEVISION</b>


Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
<b>A. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use conjunctions (and, but, because...) and
question words (where, who, why ...) correctly.


<b>B. Content:</b>


- Grammar: Conjunctions + Wh - questions.
<b>C. Preparation:</b>



- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities </b>
<b>1.</b> <b>Warm up</b>. <b>Chatting</b>


- Discuss some real questions.
1. What are you doing now ?
2. How do you go to school ?
3. How far is it from your house to
school?


<b>2. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Read the conversation and underline</b>
<b>the question words.</b>


- Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions
in order to see the function of each. Then
underline the question words.


* <b>Question Words</b>


- T asks some questions and ask SS to
find out the question words<b>.</b>


- Answer the questions.



<b>1. Read the conversation and underline </b>
<b>the question words.</b>


Ss ask and answer the questions in order
to see the function of each. Then


underline the question words.
<b>KEY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- Teacher gets feedback
<b>3. Practice.</b>


<b>2. Use one of the question words in </b>
<b>the box to complete the conversations.</b>
- When, Where, How often, Who, What
- Suggest Ss look at the answer in order
to choose the correct question word.
<b>- </b>Ask Ss to work individually by
guessing.


- Play the tape. Let Ss to look at the
conversations as they listen and check
their answers.


- Teacher gets feedback


<b>3. Complete the conversation about </b>
<b>The Wingless Penguin with suitable </b>
<b>question words.</b>



? - Ask Ss to work in pairs.


? - Ask them to share answers with their
partner.


- Teacher gets feedback
*<b>Conjunctions:</b>


<b>4. Use but, and, so, because, although </b>
<b>to complete sentences.</b>


- T gives some conjunctions then explain
the way to use.


- Explain that there is always comma
with <i>so</i> and <i>although</i>.


- T writes the example on the board, then
guides the way to do.


<b>5. Match the beginnings and the </b>
<b>endings.</b>


- T can go around the class and explain
the students how to do. Then give the
correct answers and ask Ss to check
<b>-</b>Ss liten and correct their answer.


3- How long



<b>2. Use one of the question words in </b>
<b>the box to complete the conversations.</b>
- Ss look at the answer in order to choose
the correct question word.


- Ss work individually by guessing.
<b>Keys:</b>


1. How often, What
2. Who


3. When, Where


<b>3. Complete the conversation about </b>
<b>The Wingless Penguin with suitable </b>
<b>question words.</b>


<b>Keys:</b>
A. What
A. What
A. How many
A. Why?


A. What time/When


<b>4. Use but, and, so, because, although to</b>
<b>complete sentences.</b>


- Listen to the teacher.


<b>KEY</b>


1- and
2- but


3- Although
4- because
5- so


<b>5. Match the beginnings and the </b>
<b>endings.</b>


<b>KEY</b>


1- Watching too much TV is not good
because it hurts your eyes


2- I will get up early tomorrow, so I can
be at the stadium in time.


3- Sometimes we read books and
sometimes we play sports.


4- My little brother can colour a picture
but he cannot draw.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<b>6. Work in groups. </b>


- Guide the Ss do this exercise.



<b>- </b>Ask Ss to asks and answer in groups
using the out line given in Ss’ books.


- T correct mistakes if neccessary.
<b>4. Production.</b>


? Tell your friends about television in
Viet Nam.


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.


stayed at home.
<b>6. Work in groups. </b>
<b>KEY</b>


- What is the name of the national TV
chanel?


- How many hours does it broadcast? /
How long is it on?


- (It depends on each student.)


- How much does cable TV cost per
month?


- Who is your favourite TV person?


- Do as directed.


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...


<b>***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***</b>


Date of planning: 11/1/2015


Date of teaching: 12/ 1/ 2015

<b>Period 60</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

I. Objectives:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :


<b>-</b> Read a TV schedule and descriptions of famous children’s programmes for specific
information .


<b>-</b> Ss get to know some strange / famous facts relating to television around the world .
II. Teaching aids: Computer , Poster, pictures.


<b> III.Proceduces.</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities </b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<b>I. Warm up</b>:


* Chatting :


Ask Ss to ask and answer about their
favorite programme .


* Chatting


S1 : What is your favorite programme ?
S2 : ...
S1: Which channel is it on ?


S2 :...
<b>II. New lesson.</b>


- Teacher uses different techniques to
teach vocab (situation, explaination )
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
<i><b>* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b></i>


<b>III : Practice : </b>


<b>Act1: Complete the facts below with the </b>
<b>name of the correct country .</b>


Ask Ss to complete the facts below with
the name of the correct country


- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs,


before giving the answers.


1/ New words:


<b>-</b> clumsy: Vụng về


<b>-</b> mini-series : phim truyền hình
<b>-</b> cute : dễ thương


<b>-</b> entertain : giải trí
<b>-</b> detective : thám tử


<b>-</b> adventure : Cuộc phiêu lưu
<b>-</b> audience : Khán giả


<i><b>* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R</b></i>


<b>Act1: Complete the facts below with the</b>
<b>name of the correct country .</b>


Ss complete the facts below with the
name of the correct country


share the answers in pairs, before checking
the answers and copying them into the
noterbook .


* Key :
1. Japan
2. Vietnam ,


3. Iceland
4 .the USA
5. Finland
6. Britain
<b>Act 2: Do you agree with the following </b>


<b>statements ?</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Ask Ss to read the questions and answer
the questions


- Ask Ss some more questions to check
their knowledge


<b>Act 3 a : Read about two famous TV </b>
<b>programmes for children . </b>


- Ask SS to read and use it as a model for
their talk about their favorite programme
After finishing reading , ask Ss to return to
<b>Act 2 and see if they want to change any </b>
of their previous answers


<b>Act 3 a : Read the facts in the table and </b>
<b>tick the correct programmes .</b>


<b>-</b> Let Ss read the texts while they
answer the questions .


<b>-</b> Give the answer key .


<b>IV. Production </b>


<b>Act 4 : Work in group</b>


Allow SS about 2-3 minutes to choose the
programme they prefer and prepare for
their speaking .


- Encourage ss to focus on explaining why
they like it .


- Then work in pair to read and answer
the questions aloud .


-SS answer some more questions




- Read about two famous TV
programmes for children .


- Ss read and use it as a model for their
talk about their favorite programme .
-Return to Act 2 and see if they want to
change any of their previous answers .
- Ss read the texts again then answer the
questions .


- Copy the answer key .


1. Both programmes .
2. Let’s learn


3. Hello Fatty !
4.Let’s learn
5. Hello Fatty !
6.Let’s learn


- SS choose the programme they prefer
and prepare for their speaking .


- Try to focus on explaining why they like
it .


<b>V. Home work.</b>


-Summarize the main points of the lesson..


Learn the new words
- -Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 1.
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


...
...
...
Date of planning: 11/1/2015


Date of teaching: 13/ 1/ 2015

<b>Period 61</b>




UNIT 7 TELEVISION


<b> Lesson 4 Skills 1 + Project </b>


I. Objectives:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

- Talk about a favorite TV programme .
<b>II. Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.</b>


<b>III.Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities </b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I . Warm up: </b>


<b>* Guessing game : </b>


Ask one student to talk about the


programme he/she likes watching then ask
all the class try to guess “What programme
is it ?” .


One Student talk about the programme
he/she likes watching then all the class try
to guess “What programme is it ?” .


<b>II. New lesson :</b>
<i><b>1. Teaching vocab</b></i>



- Teacher uses different techniques to
teach vocab (situation, realia)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.


* Checking vocab: Slap the board


A. Reading:


<b>Activity1 :Read the schedule for around </b>
<b>the world !</b>


Ask Ss to read the schedule .


T asks Ss to read the schedule again then
answer the questions about the time , the
name of the programme , and its content .
-T asks Ss to note where they found the


<b>1. Vocabulary : </b>


documentary : Phim tài liệu
Pacific : Thái bình dương
instructor :Huấn luyện viên .
compete : đua


Jungle : Rừng nhiệt đơi
Knowledge : Sự hiểu biết
Discover : Khám phá


universe : Vũ Trụ


Read the schedule


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

information that helped them to answer the
questions.


-Ss can compare their answers with their
partners.


-T corrects the answers:


<b>Act ivity 2 : Answer the following </b>
<b>questions about the schedule : </b>


_ Have Ss scan the schedule again and
find the information to answer .


_ Ss note where they found the
information and compare with their
partners.


_ Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
_ T checks and corrects it .


<b>Activity 3 : Read the information about </b>
<b>the people below and choose the best </b>
<b>programme for each .</b>


<b>-</b> Ask Ss to work in group 4 to do this


activity .


<b>-</b> T goes around the class to help Ss if
necessary .


- T checks and corrects then give the
answer key .


<b>2. Anwer the questions: </b>


Ss scan the schedule again and find the
information to answer


* Key:


1/ Wheelbarrow Race
2/ The Porrot Instructor .
3/ Yes , we can .


4/ A doccumentary about the colourful
world in the Pacific .


5/ No, it isn’t .


- Ss work in group 4 :


-Read the information about the people
below and choose the best programme for
each .



Key :


<i>1. Phong : Science : Journey to Jupiter.</i>
<i>2. Bob : Comedy : The Parrot Instructor</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>Nga : Game show : Children are </i>


<i>Always Right .</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<i>5.</i> <i>Linh : Animal : Ocean Life</i>


B.


<b> Speaking :</b>


<b>* Activity 4 : Work in group 4 :</b>


Ask students to tell the group about their
favorite TV programme . Their talk should
include the following information :


Encourage ss to focus on explaining why
they like it .


T reviews the expressions they can use to
talk .


<b>C. Project</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups.



- Ss interview their friends, using the
questions given in the textbook.


-Tell the group about the favorite TV
programme . The talk should include the
following information .


Try to explain the reason They like it


- My favourite programme is ………
- The name of the programme is ……….
- It’s on ………..channel.


- It’s about………(content)
- I like it because ……….


<i><b>“How important is TV to you?”</b></i>


- SS answer the questions below Then
report their results to the class.


1. What do you prefer doing in your free
time?


2. How many hours a day do you watch
television?


3. Why do you watch TV?


4. Which of the following do you like to


get information from?


5. How long do you think you can live
without TV?


<b>III. Homework:</b>


Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the
lesson and prepare skills 2.


.


-Review the lesson.
-Prepare skills 2.


<b> </b>


The name of the


programme the channel it is on


The content of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<b>...</b>


Making date: 11/1/2015
Teaching date:14/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 62 </b>


UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBOURHOOD


LESSON 6: SKILLs 2: LISTENING - WRITING
<b> </b>


I. Objectives<b> : </b>


- Listening for specific information from a recommended TV schedule .
- Writing a short guided passage about one’s TV- watching habits .
II. Teaching aids: - Computer ,Posters, cassette.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b>
<b>I. WARM-UP: Network</b>


- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


News


<b>II. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>A. Listening.</b>


<b>1. Vocabulary :</b>


Spend : trải qua , dành


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

...


Making date: 18/1/2015
Teaching date:19/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 63 </b>



<b>Unit 7: </b> <b>TELEVISION</b>
<b>Lesson : 7 Looking back</b>


<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:
+ lexical items rerated to television.


+ conjunctions (and, but, because,.) and question words (where, who, why, ….)
+ conversations about a TV programme.


<b>* Teaching aids: posters, cassette and tape.</b>
<b> II. Teaching steps.</b>


<b>Teacher ‘s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I. WARM-UP</b>


- Ask 2 – 3 Ss come to the board and
talk about their TV – watching habits.
- Give remarks and marks.


<b>. </b>


<i><b>“What are your TV – watching habits?”</b></i>
<b>II. NEW LESSON:</b>


<b>A Vocabulary:</b>


<b>1. Put the words in the box in the </b>


<b>correct columns. Add more words if </b>
<b>you can.</b>


- Tell Ss to write the words the draff
individually and then share their answer
with their partners,


T corrects their mistakes then give the
answer key.


- Let Ss repeat the words.
- Check Ss’ pronunciation.


<b>2. Use the words in the box to fill the </b>
<b>text.</b>


- Ask Ss read the text carefully and
complete them with the words in the
box.


- Remind Ss that the words, phrases and
sentences before and after the blanks
will provide the context for them to


1. Put the words in the box in the correct
<b>columns. Add more words if you can.</b>
- Write the words the draff individually and
then share their answer with their partners


<i>Key: </i>



<i>1. People: newsreader, weatherman, </i>
<i>writer, MC</i>


<i>2. Programme: cartoon, game show, </i>
<i>animals, home and garden.</i>


<i>3. Kinds of film: documentary, romance</i>


<b>2. Use the words in the box to fill the </b>
<b>text.</b>


<i>-</i>Read the text carefully and complete them
with the words in the box.


Key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

choose the correct words.
<b>B. Grammar </b>


<b>3. Use a question word to make a</b>
<b>suitable for each answer.</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the answers and
decide which question words is to be
used.


- Call some Ss to give their answers.
- Give corrections if necessary.



<b>4. Use the conjunction provided to</b>
<b>connect the sentences. </b>


- Let Ss do the task separately


- Comment and check Ss’ answers then
give the key .


<b>C. Communication </b>


<b>5. Rearrange the order of the </b>
<b>sentences to have a complete </b>


<b>conversation about a TV programme.</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pair and reorder the
conversation.


- Call some pairs to check and correct.
- Ask some pairs to practice reading
aloud to check their pronunciation.


3. 7 o’clock news 4. Comedies
5. relax 6. Game show
7. educational 8. Writers


<b>3. Use a question word to make a</b>
<b>suitable for each answer.</b>


Ss look at the answers and decide which
question words is to be used.



<i>Key: </i>


1. How many 2. What


3. Why 4. Who 5. When
<b>4. Use the conjunction provided to</b>
<b>connect the sentences. </b>


Ss do the task separately :


<i>Key: </i> 1. Ocean Life is on at 7.30 and
Laughing out Loud will follow, at 8.00
2. I have watched The Seven Kitties many
times because I like the film so much.
3. BBC One is a British channel but VTV
6 is Vietnamese channel.


4. Although Along The Coast is a famous
TV series, I have never watched it.


5. I have a lot of homework tonight, so I
can’t watch Eight Feet Below.


<b>5. Rearrange the order of the sentences </b>
<b>to have a complete conversation about a </b>
<b>TV programme.</b>


<i>-</i>Ss work in pair to reorder the conversation



<i>Key: </i>


A C B D F H G E I K
<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>


- Summarize the main point of the
lesson.


- Assign home work.


- Ss rewrite the correct order conversation
in 5 in their notebooks


<b>- Prepare Getting started – Unit 8</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

Teaching date:20/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 64 </b>


<b> UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 1: Getting started</b>
<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:


- Understand activities at the gym, review vocabs about school things and use the
combinations: go, play, do + N/V-ing.


- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
<b>B. Content:</b>



1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities.


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities </b> <b> Students’ activities </b>
<b>Warm up (5’):</b>


Network: Programmes on TV


(?) Who can give me some programmes on
TV?


<b>Network</b>


<b> Film Sports </b>


<b> Games News</b>
<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>


<b>Vocabulary (5’)</b>
- Present new words.



- Check: Rub out and Remember.


- Get Ss to read and check new words.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>* Vocabulary</b>


<b>+ gym /ʤim/: trung tâm thể dục</b>
+ equipment /i'kwipmənt/: thiết bị,
dụng cụ


+ congratulation/kən,grætju'leiʃn/ :
sự chúc mừng


+ fit (a): mạnh khỏe


+ ski /ski:/: trượt tuyết-> skiing: môn …
+ useful (a)/'ju:sful/: có ích


+ waste (v):/weist/: lãng phí
- Take notes


<b>Listen and read (30’)</b>


- Show the picture ( Ask Ss to look at the


<b>1. Listen and read: At the gym</b>
- Look at the picture and answer the



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

picture on P16), then give Ss some questions:
<i>+ Who do you see in the picture ?</i>


<i>+ Where are they ? What do you think they’re </i>
<i>talking about ?</i>


- Ask Ss to guess what it shows or what the
conversation between Duong and Mai might
be about.


<b>- Plays the recording twice.</b>


- Call Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs


<b>a) Ask Ss to work independently or in pairs to </b>
answer the questions.


- Check their answer and give the feedback.


<b>b) Colloquial expression:/kə'loukwiəl/: Sự</b>
biểu cảm thông thường.


- Refer Ss to the conversation to find the
phrases.


- Play the recording again if necessary, then
ask Ss to practise saying them together.


- Explain or give the synonyms to the Ss, then
give some examples.



<b>c) Make dialogue with the expressions. </b>
- Direct Ss to practise the short conversations
in pairs before creating their short-role plays.


<b>2, Listen and repeat these words and </b>
<b>phrases:</b>


- Play the recording


- Let Ss listen and repeat. Check and correct
their pronunciation. Give them the meaning of
the words.


- Ask Ss if these sports and games are played
in Viet Nam.


<b>3, Name these sports and games.</b>


questions


- Guess


- Listen to the tape
- Pairs work


a) Answer the questions independently
or in pairs


Keys:



1. He can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is


3. Because the equipment is modern and
the people are friendly.


4. Duong played with Duy and won ( for
the first time).


5. At the karate club.
<b>b) Colloquial expression:</b>


- Pay much attention to the lesson.
Key: 1. Wow: used to express surprise.
2. Congratulation: used to congratule sb/
to tell sb that you are pleased about their
success


3. Great: used to show admiration.
4. See you (then): used when you say
goodbye.


<b>c) Make dialogue with the expressions.</b>
A: Congratulation! You’ve won the first
prize on English speaking contest.


B: Thank you.


C: Great! You did very well.


D: …….


<b>2, Listen and repeat these words and </b>
<b>phrases:</b>


- Listen and repeat the words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- Ask Ss to write the correct words in the
spaces.


- Check their doings and give the feedback.
- Help Ss to distinguish between a sport and a
game:


<i>A sport: an activity that you do for pleasure </i>
and that you need physical exercise.


<i>A game: an activity or a sport with rules in </i>
which people or teams compete against each
other.


<b>4, Put the words from 2 in the correct </b>
<b>groups:</b>


- Let Ss work in pairs and put the words in the
correct group.


- Check the Ss’answers, then give the
feedback.



<b>5. Put the correct form of the verbs play, do,</b>
<i><b>go, watch and like in the blanks.</b></i>


- Allow Ss time to do the task individually.
- Call Ss to write their answer on the board and
ask the class to comment and give them the
correct answers.


<b>6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner these </b>
<b>questions to find out how sporty they are.</b>
- Let Ss work in pairs or groups asking and
answering the questions.


- Move around the class to help / encourage Ss
to do their task.


- Call some pairs to demonstrate their results
in front of the class.


1. cycling 2. table tennis
3. running 4. swimming
5. chess 6. skiing
- Give some examples:


A sport: baseball, volleyball, soccer,
skiing….


A game: chess, …


<b>4, Put the words from 2 in the correct </b>


<b>groups:</b>


Key:


Play: chess, table tennis, volleyball,
tennis


Do: boxing, aerobics, karate


Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running,
skiing.


<b>5. Put the correct form of the verbs </b>
<i><b>play, do, go, watch and like in the </b></i>
<b>blanks.</b>


Key:


1. do 2. is watching 3. goes
4. likes 5. played


<b>6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner </b>
<b>these questions to find out how sporty </b>
<b>they are.</b>


- Work in pairs or groups asking and
answering the questions.


- Some pairs to demonstrate their results
in front of the class.



<b>Consolidation (3')</b>


? What is the topic of the lesson today? - Answer individually
<b>Homework(2’)</b>


- Ask Ss to review vocabulary about sports and
games.


- Prapare the next lesson


- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading “Listen and read”
- Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.


<b>..</b>


………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Teaching date:21/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 65 </b>


<b> UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 2:</b> A CLOSER LOOK 1<i><b> </b></i>


<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:


- Pronounce the sounds /eə / and /iə/ correctly in isolation and in context and use


lexical items related to the topic “Sports and Games”


- Training reading, speaking skills.
<b>B. Content:</b>


1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough </b>
time for all the activities.


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Warm up (5’):</b>


Network: Sports and Games


Who can give me some sports and games?
- Introduce the new lesson.


<b>I. Vocabulary (15')</b>
<i><b>1. Teaching vocab</b></i>


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach


vocab (situation, realia)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Slap the board


<b>1. Listen and repeat the words.</b>
Ask Ss to look at the pictures on p18
- Play the recording and let Ss listen
? Listen and read then check your answer.


- Play it again and pause for them to repeat each
word.


<b>2. Now write the words under the pictures.</b>


<b>Warm up. Network</b>


<b> Cycling </b>
<b>Chess </b>


<b> Running </b>
<b>Karate</b>


*/ New words.
- boat: con thuyền


- goggles /'gɔglz/ (n): kính bơi


- skateboard (n,v): ván trượt, trượt ván
- racket /'rækit/ (n): cái vợt



- sphere/sfiə/ : hình cầu, quả cầu
- Checking vocab: Slap the board
<b>1. Listen and repeat the words.</b>
- Listen and repeat the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

? - Ask Ss to work in groups.


? - Ask them to share answers with other
groups.


- Teacher gets feedback


<b>3. What sports are these things for? Match the</b>
<b>things in column A with a sport/game in </b>


<b>column B.</b>


- Ask Ss to do the task independently first.
- Call Ss to write their answers on the board,
then check


<b>II. Pronunciation (15')</b>


- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds /
<b>eə / and /iə /.</b>


? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds
<b>4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the </b>
<b>sounds / eə / and /iə /. </b>



- Asks Ss to practice sounding out the sound
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number
the words in the order they hear.


- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to
repeat.


<b>5. Read the words and say them aloud. </b>
<b>Which one has / eə / or /iə /.</b>


- Play the tape twice


? Work individually to put the words into two
groups.


? Check your answers in groups.


- Have two students write on the board.
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary.
<b>III. Production ( 6')</b>


<b>6. Listen to the sentences and choose the right</b>
<b>words.</b>


- Play the recroding


? Ask the Ss to repeat sentence by sentence.


<b>2. Now write the words under the </b>


<b>pictures.</b>


Ss work in groups to write the words/
phrases in the box under the pictures
<b>KEY</b>


1- a bicycle 2- a ball
3- sports shoes 4- skis
5- a boat 6- a racquet
7- a skateboard 8- goggles
- Ss work individually


<b>3. What sports are these things for? </b>
<b>Match the things in column A with a </b>
<b>sport/game in column B.</b>


<b>KEY</b>


1-c 2- d 3- a 4-e
5- g 6- h 7- b 8- f
<b>II. Pronunciation (15')</b>


- Listen to the teacher
- Ss work in groups


- Ss share answers with other groups.
<b>4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to</b>
<b>the sounds / eə / and /iə /. </b>


- Practice sounding out the sound


1. / eə /: where, there, fair, pair,


prepare


2. /iə /: here, fear, nearly, idea,
volunteer.


<b>5. Read the words and say them </b>
<b>aloud. Which one has / eə / or /iə /.</b>
- Listen to the tape


<b>Key:</b>


1.A 2.C 3.B
4.A 5.B 6.A


<b>6. Listen to the sentences and choose </b>
<b>the right words.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

- Help Ss recognize the two sounds, then
underline the words in the sentences.
<b>IV. Consolidation (2')</b>


? How to make the sounds / eə / and /iə /.
? Find some more words that have these two
sounds


.V. Homework (2')


? Learn by heart all the new words.


? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2


/ eə / and /iə / together
- Listen and repeat
<b>Key:</b>


1. fair 2. hear 3. ida
4. square 5. nearly 6.
cheere


- Listen and take turns reading the
sentence.


- Answer the question.


- Do as directed


Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:26/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 66 </b>


<b> UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>


<b>Lesson 3:</b> A CLOSER LOOK 2<i><b> </b></i>


<b>A. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss can review the past simple tense and do exercises and this tense.
- Ss can use imperatives to tell sb to do st or to give a direct order.



<b>B. Content:</b>


- Grammar: Past simple tense ( Regular and irregular verbs )
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities </b>
<b>2. Warm up . Pelnalism:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>2. Presentation.</b>
<b>Past Simple tense:</b>


<b>- We use the Past Simple tense to talk aboutt </b>
a finished action in the past. We often say
<b>when it happened.</b>


Notes:


* Regular verbs: V+ed


* Irregualr verbs: V2 ( was, were, had,
went....)


<b>3. Practice.</b>



<b>1. Complete the sentences with did, was or </b>
<i><b>were</b></i>


<b>- Ask Ss to work in pairs to give the answers.</b>
- Help / Observe Ss when necessary and
correct Ss’ mistakes.


- Teacher gives feedback


<b>2. Write the correct form of the verbs to </b>
<b>complete the conversation.</b>


? - Ask Ss to work individually.


- Correct their answers and may call on some
Ss separately to say their answers for the
class.


- Give explanation when necessary


? - Ask Ss to read the conversation with the
correct verbs forms. Correct their


pronunciation and intonation.


<b>3. Work in group. Ask and answer </b>
<b>questions anout last weekend.</b>


- T divides the class into 4 or 5 groups. Ss
take turns asking and answering questions


about their last weekend. Some more able Ss
can report to the class about one of their
friends.


- T can ask Ss to give the rule for using each
of the tenses they have learnt. T writes
Ss’rules down on the board. Then T tells Ss
that they are going to learn one more tense.
<b>Imperatives:</b>


- Answer the questions.


<b>- Review Past simple tense:</b>
(+) S + Ved / 2 + ...


(-) S + didn’t + V + ...
(?) Did + S + V + ....?
Yes, S + did


No, S + didn’t


<b>1. Complete the sentences with did, </b>
<i><b>was or were</b></i>


<b>KEY</b>
1- were
2- was


3- was- did- was
4- Did –were-did-was



<b>2. Write the correct form of the verbs </b>
<b>to complete the conversation.</b>


- Ss work individually.


- Read the conversation with the correct
verbs forms and pronunciation and
intonation.


<b>Keys: </b>


1. was 2. didn’t do


3. sat 4. watched 5. went
6. had 7. did 8. visited
9. ate 10. scored


<b>3. Work in group. Ask and answer </b>
<b>questions anout last weekend.</b>


<b>Example:</b>


S1: Did you play any sports last
weekend?


S2: Yes, and I enjoyed myself so much.
S1: Really? What did you do ?


S2: I ...


<b>Imperatives:</b>


make

take

go

play

visit



played

visited

made

<sub>went</sub>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

- T tells Ss the form and the use of
imperatives and give some examples.
Form: (+) V + ...


(-) Don’t + V + ...


-> Used to ask someone to do something, or
to give a direct order.


<b>4. Write sentences to tell your friends what </b>
<b>to do or not to do.</b>


- ? Ss work individually, write their answers


- Call Ss to read aloud their answers
- Correct mistakes if necessary.


5. Tell your friends what to do or not to do
<b>at the gym.</b>


- Let Ss work in pairs or in groups, take turns
telling their friends what to do and not to do
at the gym.



- Help Ss and let them give as many sentences
as possible.


- T can go around the class and explain the
students how to do. Then give the correct
answers and ask Ss to check


<b>4. Production.( </b> Further Practice)


? If there is time, let Ss take turns giving an
order or telling their friends to do an activity
and act out the order.


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the
textbook. Prepare the new lesson.


- Pay much attention to the teacher.
- take notes


<b>4. Write sentences to tell your friends </b>
<b>what to do or not to do.</b>


<b>KEY</b>


1- Take your umbrella.
2- Please don’t litter.
3- Please hurry up.
4- ...don’t train too hard.


5- Put on your coat.


<b>5. Work in pairs or groups. </b>
<b>KEY</b>


- Pay your fee first


- Put on your trainers / sports shoes.
- Listen to the instructor carefully.
- Don’t litter.


- Don’t eat or drink at the gym.
- Don’t speak and laugh loudly.
...


- Do as directed.


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.
<b>………..</b>


Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:27/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 67 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>Lesson 4:</b> <b>Communication</b> <i><b> </b></i>
<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Read the new vocabulary.



- Understand about the five rings represent the five major regions of the World.
<b>B. Content:</b>


1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities </b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I. Warm up:</b>


<b>* Chatting: </b>


Ask Ss to ask and answer about their favorite
sports.


<b>* Chatting </b>


S1 : What is your favorite sport ?
S2 : ...
S1: Do you like football ?


S2 :...
S1: How often is the O.Games held ?


S2 :...
<b>II. New lesson.</b>


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, explaination )


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
- Explain the 5 interlocked rings: The five
rings represent the five major regions of the
World ( Africa, the America, Asia, Europe
and Oceania) and every national flag in the
world has at least one of the five colors
( blue, yellow, black, greeen, and red)


* Vocabulary checking: R.O.R
<b>III: Practice: </b>


<b> Act1: Sports quiz. Work in pairs. Do the</b>
<b>quiz.</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs and find the
answers to the quizzes.


<b>1/ New words:</b>
<b>-</b> fit (a): mạnh khỏe
<b>-</b> last (v): kéo dài


<b>-</b> marathon /'mỉrəθən/: chạy maratơng
<b>-</b> ring (n): vịng trịn



<b>-</b> achievement(n): thành tích, thành tựu
<b>-</b> Pay much attention to the teacher.


* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R


<b>Act1: Complete the facts below with the </b>
<b>name of the correct country .</b>


- Ss work in pairs and find the answers to
the quizzes.


* Key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

- Give the correct answers.


side)


2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (divide into
2 halves)


3. They are held every four years


4 . No, there weren’t Olympic Games in
2011. (They were held in 004,2008,2012...
5. A marathon is 42,195 kilometer long
(26 miles and 385 yards)


6. They were held in Olympia (in Ancient
Greece in 776 BC)



7. Boxing does.
<b>Act 2: In pairs, interview your partner </b>


<b>using the following questions. Ask for </b>
<b>more information.</b>


<b>- Ask SS to work in pairs to do the task. </b>
Ask and answer the questions


- Encourage Ss to talk and raise as many
questions as possible.


<b>Act 3: Think of a sportsman/ sportwoman </b>
<b>you like. Talk about him/ her with a </b>


<b>partner. Using the cues.</b>


<b>- Divide the class into groups of four or five, </b>
encourage Ss to talk about their favorite
sportsperson one by one. Using these
questions:


+ What is his / her name?
+What sport does he/ she play?


+What were her/ his last achievements ?
+ Why do you like him/ her?


<b>IV. Production: </b>



<b>Act 2: interview your partner using the </b>
<b>following questions. Ask for more </b>
<b>information.</b>


- Work in pairs to do the task. Ask and
answer the questions


Possible answers:
1. I often play....


2. I play badminton, soccer, shutlle cock..
3. I like watching sports show like


football match, tennis/ badminton...
4. Ss’answer


5. Yes, I’d like to learn to play...
6. Name famous sportspersons:


Footballer: C.Ronaldo, Messi, N.C.
Vinh


Tennis player: Federa, Nadan, William
Act 3: Think of a sportsman/


<b>sportwoman you like. Talk about him/ </b>
<b>her with a partner. Using the cues.</b>
- Work in groups of four or five.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

- Encourage ss to speak about their favorite


sportsperson they like in front of the class.


- Ss speak about their favorite sportsperson
they like in front of the class.


<b>V. Home work.</b>


- Summarize the main points of the lesson.


- Learn the new words
- Review the lesson.
- Prepare skill 1


Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:28/1/2015
<b>PERIOD 68</b>


<b> UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 5:</b><i><b> SKILLS 1 </b></i>
<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:


- Read for specific information about famous sportsperson “The King of Football”.
- Talk about the activities/ sports / games they do in their spare time.


<b>B. Content:</b>


- Adverbs of frequency
- How often….?



<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities </b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I . Warm up: </b>


<b>* Guessing game: </b>


Ask one student to talk about the


sportsperson he/she likes , then ask all the
class try to guess “Who is this in the


picture ?”


One Student talk about the sportsperson he/she
likes watching then all the class try to guess
“Who is this in the picture ?”.


<b>II. New lesson:</b>
<i><b>1. Teaching vocab</b></i>


- Teacher uses different techniques to
teach vocab (situation, realia)



- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.


<b>Vocabulary: </b>


- regard /ri'gɑ:d/: quan tâm, kính trọng
- professional: chuyên nghiệp


- score (v) ghi bàn
- vote (v): bầu


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

* Checking vocab: Slap the board
A. Reading:


<b>1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions:</b>
- Ask Ss to dicuss the questions in pairs.
Encourage them to give their ideas as
many as possible.


<b>2: Read the text quickly to check your </b>
<b>ideas in 1.</b>


- Have Ss scan the text again and check
the ideas in 1.


- Ss note where they found the information
and compare with their partners.


- Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it.



<b>3: Read again and answer the questions.</b>
- Ask Ss to read the text again and find the
information to answer.


- T goes around the class to help Ss if
necessary.


- T checks and corrects then gives the
answer key.


* Checking vocab: Slap the board


<b>1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions:</b>
- Dicuss the questions in pairs.


Suggested answers:


1. Yes, I do. He is regarded as the King of
Football.


2. He comes from Brazil.


3. He won the first World Cup when he was
17.


<b>2: Read the text quickly to check your ideas </b>
<b>in 1.</b>


- Ss scan the text again and check the ideas in
1.



<b>3: Read again and answer the questions.</b>
- Read the information about Pele and answer
the questions:
Key:
1. He was born on 21st October 1940.
2. People call him “The King of Football ”
because he is such a good football player.
3. He became Football Player of the Century
in 1999.
4. He scored 1,281 goals in total.
5. Yes, he is.
B. Speaking


<b> 4. How often do you go/do/play these </b>
<b>sports/games? Tick the right column:</b>


- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick
the right column.


4. <b>How often do you go/do/play these </b>
<b>sports/games? Tick the right column:</b>
- Read the table and tick the right column.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>5. Work in groups. What kind of </b>
<b>sports/games do you do most often? </b>
<b>Why?</b>


- Ask students to work in groups to ask
and answer the question. They should refer


the information in table 4.


- Encourage Ss to focus on explaining why
they like it.


<b>6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the </b>
<b>following questions.</b>


- Divide the class into groups of 4 or 5. Let
them discuss their answers to the


questions.


Report the results to the class.


- When Ss finish, ask one student from
each group “ What is the most interesting
<i>thing you learnt from your discussion?”</i>


10.Skateboard
ing


11.Skiing


<b>5. Work in groups. What kind of </b>


<b>sports/games do you do most often? Why?</b>
-Work in groups of 4 or 5 and discuss their
answers to the questions.



<b>6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the </b>
<b>following questions.</b>


- Call Ss to report their results to the class.
<i>Suggested answers:</i>


<b>1.</b> Yes, I do / No, I don’t


<b>2.</b> I play football / I only watch it.


<b>3.</b> I play …; No, I’ve just played it for a few
days.


<b>4.</b> Yes, I do / No, I don’t


<b>5.</b> I often read books in the library./ I……
<b>III. Homework:</b>


- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of
the lesson and prepare skills 2.


- Review the lesson.
- Prepare skills 2.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:2/2/2015
<b>PERIOD 69</b>


<b>UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 6:</b><i><b> SKILLS 2</b></i>



<i><b> A. Objectives: </b></i>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:


- Listening to get information about the sports/ games people play.
- Writing a paragraph about the sport/ game they like.


<b>B. Content: Listening and writing</b>
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<b>I. WARM-UP: Network</b>


(?) Can you tell me the names of TV
programmes?


- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


jogging


<b>II. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>A. Listening.</b>



<i>* Pre - listening:</i>


- Present some new words.


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Rub out and remmember.
<b>* </b><i>While – listening:</i>


<b>Activity 1.</b>


<b>Listen to the pasage. Who are they about?</b>
- Play the recording once only. Ask Ss to listen
and say who the passage are about.


<b>1. Vocabulary:</b>


- create (v) /kri:'eit/ : tạo ra
- hobby = interest: sở thích


- to be good/ bad at: giỏi / kém về


<i>* Vocabulary checking</i> : R.O.R
<b>Activity 1.</b>


<b>- Listen to the recording once only. </b>
<b>- Focus on the information they need.</b>


<b>Key:</b>


1, Hai 2, Alice 3, Bill 4, Trung
<b>Activity 2.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>2. Listen to the pasage again. Then write T </b>
<b>or F for each sentence.</b>


- Have Ss listen to the recording twice.


- Ask Ss to only focus on the information they
need.


- T checks and corrects then give the answer
key


<b>* </b>


<i>Post – listening:</i>


<b>3. Listen to the pasage again. Fill in each </b>
<b>blank to complete the sentences.</b>


- Play the recording again and ask Ss to fill in
each blank to complete the sentences


- Check Ss’answers and give the feedback.


sentence. Share their answer together
- check answer key:



1-F 2-T 3-T 4-F 5-T


<b>Activity 3.</b>


<b>-</b> Listen to the tape again and fill in the
blank.


<b>-</b> Key:


1. Club 2. Play 3. Watching
4. Bill 5. goes


<b>B. Writing</b>


<i>Pre-writing</i><b>: Braistorming</b>


- Allow Ss to refer to the reading and other
sections for useful language. Note interesting
expressions and language on the board.


- Tell Ss to write draft first, Ss should use the
cues and their own ideas.


<i>While-writing</i><b>:</b>


<b>Write about a sport/ game you like. Use</b>
<b>your own ideas and the following as cues</b>
- Help Ss organize their ideas for writing.
- Ask Ss to look at the suggested questions for


the writing.


- Encourage Ss to write a paragraph of about
80-100 words about the sport / game they like,
covering as many ideas as possible.


- Ask Ss to pay special attention to
punctuation, structural elements, linking
words.


<i>Post-writing:</i>


- Collect one or some Ss’writing papers and
mark them, then give comments to the class.


<b>Brainstorming:</b>


- Write things related to sports/ games they
like:


Name, team/individual sport, time, player,
equipment.


<b>-</b> Pay much attention to the lesson


<b>-</b> Write draft first, Ss should use the cues
and their own ideas.


<b>-</b> Look at the suggested questions for the
writing.



<b>-</b> Write a paragraph of about 80-100
words about the sport / game they like,
covering as many ideas as possible.
<b>-</b> Pay special attention to punctuation,


structural elements, linking words.


<b>-</b> Correct mistakes if necessary.
<b>III. HOMEWORK</b>


- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Assign home work.


- Ss edit and revise their writing as
homework.


- Prepare new lesson: Looking back.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<b>Adjustment:</b>


………
Making date: 1/2/2015


Teaching date:3/2/2015
<b>PERIOD 70</b>


<b>UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 7:</b><i><b> LOOKING BACK + PROJECT</b></i>
<b>A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:</b>


+ lexical items related to sports / games.


+ Past simple tense and imperatives
+ Games: “Blind man’s bluff.”
<b>B. Content: </b>


1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
<b>C. Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work


<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>I. WARM-UP</b>


<i><b>What is your favourite sport / game?</b></i>
- Ask 2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk
about their favourite sport/ game.


- Give remarks and marks.


2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk about
their favourite sport/ game.


<b>II. NEW LESSON:</b>
<b>A Vocabulary:</b>



<b>1. Find one odd word or phrase in each </b>
<b>line.</b>


- Tell Ss to find the words individually and
then share their answer with their partners,
T corrects their mistakes then give the answer
key.


- Let Ss repeat the words.
- Check Ss’ pronunciation.


<b>2. Read the four words in each line. Write </b>
<b>the name of the game or sport the four </b>
<b>words belong to.</b>


- Ask Ss repeat the words .
- Check Ss’ pronunciation.


- Tell Ss to write the answers in the


<b>1. Find one odd word or phrase in each </b>
<b>line.</b>


- Find the words individually and then
share their answer with their partners


<i>Key: </i>


<i>1.C 2.A 3.D 4.C 5.B</i>



<b>2. Read the four words in each line. </b>
<b>Write the name of the game or sport the </b>
<b>four words belong to.</b>


<i>- </i>Repeat the words .


- Write the answers in the notebooks.
<b>Key: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

notebooks.


- Correct mistakes.
<b>B. Grammar </b>


<b>3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the</b>
<b>correct form.</b>


- Ask Ss to supply the correct form of the
verbs in the brackets.


- Call some Ss to give their answers.
- Give corrections if necessary.


<b>4. What did you say in these situations ? </b>
- Let Ss do the task in pairs or groups to finish
or write the sentence


- Comment and check Ss’ answers then give
the key.



<b>5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish</b>
<b>the pasage.</b>


- Ask Ss to do the task individually first. They
they can check their answers with their
partners before discussing the answers as a
class.


- Give corrections.


- Have some Ss read the whole passage aloud
<b>C. Communication </b>


<b>6. Match the questions in A with their </b>
<b>correct answers in B.</b>


- Ask Ss to read the question and answers
once or twice. Then match them.


- Ask Ss to work in pair and role-play the
question and answers.


- Ask some pairs to complete the
self-assessment. Identify any difficulties/ weak
areas and provide further practice as needed.
<b>D. Project.</b>


<b>1. Read the passage about the game “Blind </b>
<b>man’s bluff”</b>



- T guides Ss to play this game.


- Explain new words and anything difficult
for Ss. Make sure they understand everything
throughly.


3. boxing 4. Table tennis
5. basketball


<b>3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the</b>
<b>correct form.</b>


- Supply the correct form of the verbs in the
brackets


<i>Key: </i>


1. are 2. Took 3. Started


4. are playing 5. Did you do- cycled -
watched


<b>4. What did you say in these situations ? </b>
Ss do the task separately:


<i>Key: </i>


1. Please stop making noise.



2. Go out to play with your friends.
3. Don’t feed the animals.


4. Stand in line, boys!
5. Don’t tease the dog.


<b>5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish</b>
<b>the pasage.</b>


- Do the task individually. Check the
answers with their partners before
discussing.


- Read the whole passage.


1. play 2. Hear 3. Games
4. sports 5. famous


<b>6. Match the questions in A with their </b>
<b>correct answers in B.</b>


- Read the question and answers once or
twice. Then match them.


- Work in pair and role-play the question
and answers.


<i>Key: </i>


1-a 2-e 3-b 4-c 5- d



<b>1. Read the passage about the game “Blind</b>
<b>man’s bluff”</b>


- Listen to the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

New words:


- blindfold : người bị bịt mắt
<i>- touch (v): đụng, chạm</i>
<i>- hint: gợi ý nhỏ</i>


- Let Ss work in groups to play game. - Do as directed.
<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>


- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
<b>- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started – U9</b>


- Listen to the teacher.


<b>- Prepare Getting started - Unit 8</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>


<b> Lesson 1 : Getting started ( WHAT NICE PHOTOS)</b>
<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>


<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss name some continents,countries,cities and lanmarks in English such as: north and </b>


sound america,europe...


- Understand the content of the dialogue between Mai and Tom and do excercises well.
- Ss can talk sth about continents,countries,cities and lanmarks.


+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>


<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES :</b>


<b>4.</b>


<b>C</b> <b>on</b>


<b>s</b> <b>oli</b>


<b>d</b> <b>ati</b>


<b>o</b> <b>n(</b>


<b>3</b> <b>’): </b>


<b>T’s activities.</b> <b>T</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>



<b>Warm up: 3’</b>
T asks Sts


Have you ever been to Brazil?


Do you know about Rio de Janeiro capital?
Where is the Big Ben?


<b>I.Vocabulary.</b>


T use picture to present new words
1. continent : ( n) : lục địa


2. country :( n):đất nươc,quốc gia
3. Antarctica(n): Nam cực


4.Africa : châu phi


5.South America: (n) Nam Mỹ
6.North America:(n) Bắc Mỹ
7.Europe(n):Châu Âu


8.Asia(n):Châu Á
9.Australia(n):Châu Úc
5. be (v): : been ( pII)


6. photo (n) : bức ảnh (realial)


*Revise some adjs: hot, cold,


clean,big,modern,great….


<b>Name the continents</b>


* Check vocab using “the pictures E3”
Ask sts to match


Ask sts to copy in note books
<b>II. The dialogue :</b>


<b>Task 1.</b>


<b>- T asks sts to listen to the dialouge twice on</b>
page 26 and answer the questions :


<b>7’</b>


<b>5’</b>


<b>10’</b>


Sts look at picture


Listen to T’s eliciting then
gives new words


Read in chorus
Read individually


Go to board to match


Copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- What have you learnt today?
- What’s the difference between continent , a country, a city ,….?


<b> 5. Homework(2’): </b>


- Asks sts to learn Voc by heart.
- Do ex A in workbook .


Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:9/2/2015
<b>PERIOD 72</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>
<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”</b>
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>


<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>



<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warm-up: Kim’s game (5’)</b>


- Devide the class into 2 teams


- Show the adjectives on the screen in 30
seconds and asks ss to remember


- Which team remembers more words will
be the winner.


Eleciting:


<b>I. Vocabulary: (10’)</b>


<b>1. Match the words in A with their </b>
<b>opposite in B. Some words may have </b>
<b>more than one opposite.</b>


- Ask Ss to match the words they know in
pairs.


- point out that some adj in the left column
can have more than one opposites in the
right column.


- Give feedback.


- Have Ss practice reading the adj.


<b>2. Create word webs</b>


- Have Ss work in groups


- Tell them they can use the words in 1.
- Encourage ss to add other adj.


- Give feedback. Point out that some adj
can’t go with particular nouns


<b>II. Pronunciation (10’)</b>


<b>3. Listen and write the words you hear in</b>
<b>the appropriate column. Then, read the </b>
<b>words aloud.</b>


<b>Adj: </b>


Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean,
historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe,
dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot,
modern, expensive, noisy.


Key:


Old- new, dangerous – safe, quiet –
noisy, dry – wet, boring- exciting,
clean – dirty, historic – modern, cheap
– expensive, cold – hot.



Key:


City: beautiful, peaceful, exciting,
modern, big, polutted, safe


People: nice, friendly, unfriendly,
open, noisy, interesting


Food: delicious, awful, good, tasty
Weather: bad, rainy, hot, cold, wet
Building: old, modern, tall, new


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

- Practice the Sound / Əu / and /ai /


together. Model the two sounds with cold
and sky.


- Let ss see how the sounds are formed.
- Ask Ss to give words that have these two
sounds. Play the recording and ask Ss to
listen and fill in the suitable column. Play
the recording as many times as necessary.
- Give feedback and have ss repeat the
sounds as a class.


<b>4. Listen and repeat.</b>


- Have Ss practice reading in bold first.
- Ask them to say if the word has an / Əu /
or /ai / sound.



- Have ss repeat the sentences.


- Providing further practice by dividing the
class into two groups. Have groups read
alternate lines.


<b>III. Grammar ( 15’)</b>


<b>Superlatives of long adjectives</b>


<b>5. Complete the fact sheet by choosing </b>
<b>one picture...</b>


- Let ss have a quick look at all the pictures.
Ask ss to work individually to complete the
fact sheet, using one of the pictures


provided.


- Have Ss work in pairs compare the


answers. Ask them to discuss whether they
agree with each other’s answers.


<b>6. Read this article about Britain.</b>


- Ask Ss to look at their earlier answers in
ex 5 to check if they are similar to what the
text says.



- Have Ss ask and answer questions about
the fact using most + adj


<b>7. Consolidation (3')</b>


? How to make the sounds / Əu / and /ai /
? Find some more words that have these
two sounds


.V. Homework (2')


? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2.


/ai /: sky, exciting, high, fine, flight


Key:
1. London
2. Oxford uni.
3. Shakespeare
4. fish and chips
5. tea


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:10/2/2015
<b>PERIOD 73</b>


<b> UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>


<b>Lesson 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2</b>
<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>


<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”</b>
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warmer (5'): Slap the board</b>


- Elicit some words form Ss


- Teacher divides the class into two teams.
? Go to the board, listen to the teacher and
slap on the correct words.


- Teacher gets feedback


-> Today we are going to learn about school
activities and subjects.



- Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean,
historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe,
dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot,
modern, expensive, noisy.


- Work in groups


<b>I. Presentation (15')</b>


<b>Grammar: The present perfect</b>


- Ask Ss to recall what Tom tol Mai about
in the conversation in getting started


- Ss underline all the verbs in the present
perfect tense.


- Use grammar box to explain that pp is
used to show that one has had or has never
had this experience.


- Provide the form of the pp.
S + have/ has + past participate


- Play ‘board race’ game: write two lists of
verbs on the board. Two teams will race to
the board to write the pp of these verbs.
Each team gets one pointfor the correct
participate. The teams finishes first gets 2
extra points



- underline all the verbs in the present
perfect tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b>II. Practice (25’)</b>


<i><b>1. Put the verbs in the brackets into the pp</b></i>
- Tell Ss that some information for this
exerciseis notmentioned directly in the
recording – it must be inferred.


_ Have ss do the task and ask them to
support their answers with parts in the
recording.


<i><b>2. Put the verbs in the brackets in the </b></i>
<i><b>correct form</b></i>


- Have Ss work on this exercise


individually before they compare answers
with each other.


- Give feedback as a class discussion.
<i><b>3. Look at Tom webpage. Tell a partner </b></i>
<i><b>which he has done this week. </b></i>


- Elicit what there is in the photos by asking
ss questions



- Ask ss to provide the verbs and their pp
- Have Ss write the sentences in full in their
notebooks, then in pairs take turns talking
about what Tom has done this week.
<b>III. Production (5’)</b>


<b>Class survey</b>


- Make sure Ss can move around and ask
different classmates for different questions.
- ss shouldn’t ask the same person all the
questions.


- When they have finished the survey, make
a class poll by asking ss to report the


results.


- Count the number os ‘yes’ answers to
each question and find out what is the thing
the most ss have ever done, and the thing
that the least of them/ or no one has done.
<b>Home work.</b>


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.


Work individually
<b>-</b> Key:



1. has been 2. has been
3. has visited 4. has been
5. hasn’t been


Key:


1. Have you seen... I have seen
2. go 3. have never been
4. clean 5. takes 6. has eaten
Key:


1. He has read a book.
2. He has eaten “pho’.
3. Her has played football.
4. He has got an A+.
5. He has washed his dog.


- move around and ask the questions in
the survey


<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>Period 80 : </b>

<b>Test 3</b>


<b>I. Mục đích yêu cầu:</b>


<b> Kiểm tra kiến thức hs đạt được trong quá trinh học, đặc biệt là các kiến thức có </b>
<b>trong các unit 7, 8, 9.</b>


<b>1. Đọc hiểu : </b>



Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
<b>2. Viết:</b>


Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
<b>3. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :</b>


Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.


<b>II. Chuẩn bị :</b>
Bài photo.
<b>III. Ma trận :</b>


<b>Cấpđộ tư duy</b>


<b> Chủ đề</b> <b> Nhận biết</b> <b> Thông hiểu</b> <b> Vận dụng</b> <b>Tổng</b>


<b>TNKQ</b> <b> TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b> TL</b> <b>TNKQ</b> <b> TL</b>


<b>Language Pho</b> 4


1.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 1.0</b>


<b>focus</b> <b>Vocab</b> 6


3.0



<b>6</b>


<b> 3.0</b>


<b>Gram</b> 8


2.0


<b>8</b>


<b> 2.0</b>


<b> Reading</b> 4


2.0


<b>4</b>


<b> 2.0</b>


<b> Writing</b> 4


2.0
<b>4 </b>
<b> 2.0</b>
<b> Tổng</b> <b> 6</b>


<b> </b> <b><sub> 3.0</sub></b> <b> 16 </b> <b><sub> 5.0</sub></b> <b>4<sub> 2.0</sub></b> <b>26<sub> 10.</sub></b>
<b>IV. Đề bài :</b>



<b>I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:</b>


<b>Question 1: Odd one out. Which underlined sound is pnonounced differently in each </b>
<b>group? ( 1 point )</b>


<b>A. idea </b> <b>B. aerobics </b> <b>C. fair </b> <b>D.pair</b>


<b>A. this </b> <b>B. there </b> <b>C. than </b> <b>D. thank </b>


<b>A. worked </b> <b>B. needed </b> <b>C. wanted </b> <b>D. rented</b>


<b>A. cold </b> <b>B. long </b> <b>C. snow </b> <b>D. hold</b>


<b>Question 2: Choose and circle the best answerA, B, C or D ( 3points )</b>
1. The food is very ………..


<b>A. long </b> <b>B. delicious </b> <b>C. noisy </b> <b>D. historic</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>A. play </b> <b>B. do </b> <b>C.go </b> <b>D. have</b>
3. Who is the most popular British writer in the world ?


<b>A. Dickens </b> <b>B. William Shakespeare C. Hemingway D. To Hoai</b>
4. Hai can ……… boxing well.


<b>A. do </b> <b>B. play </b> <b>C. go </b> <b>D. have</b>


5. The …….. tells people what is happening in Viet Nam and the rest of the world.
<b>A. national </b> <b>B. cartoon</b> <b>C. game show</b> <b>D. 7 o’clock news </b>
6. Big Ben is the most famous tower in …..



<b>A. Viet Nam </b> <b>B. England </b> <b>C. America </b> <b>D. Australia</b>
<b>II. PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs.( 2points )</b>
1. He ( not go ) out last night, he ( stay ) at home.


2. Lan ( learn ) English for 2 years ?
- No, he ( learn ) for 3 years.
3. you ( wear ) uniform yesterday ?
No. I ( not wear ) yesterday.


4. your mother ( read ) book every night ?
- No, she ( watch ) TV.


<b>Question 2: Read the following passage and answer the questions ( 2.0 points)</b>


Australia is a island continent in the South Pacific. The capital is Canberra, but the
city with the biggest population is Sydney, which has nearly four million. English is the first
language of most people, but there are also immigrants who speak other languages.


1. Where is Australia?


...
2. Is Canberra the capital of Australia?


...
3. What is the population of Sydney?


...


4. Do Australian people only speak English?


...


<b>Question 3: Rearrange the words to complete the sentences. ( 6B-2.0 points; 6A-1point)</b>
1, lives / street / grandparents / he / Hoang Quoc Viet / his / on / with.


……….
2, tallest / my / is / the / family / in / brother/ person / my.


……….
3, lives / very / from / he / far / office / his.


……….
4. did/ Who/ play/ with/ you/ badminton/ yesterday?


………....
<b>Question 4 ( 6A ). Rewrite te following sentences ( 1.0 points)</b>


1. No river in the world is as long as The Nile river


-> The Nile river ……….………
2. Nam is taller than Ba


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

3.Nam is interested in watching televison


-> Nam likes ………
4. There isn’t any sugar in the coffee.


-> The coffee………..


<b>Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:</b>



<b>A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:</b>


<b>Question 1: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm </b>


1A 2D 3A 4B


<b>Question 2: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm</b>


1B 2C 3B 4A 5D 6B


<b>B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:</b>


<b>Question 1: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm</b>
1. didn’t go – stayed


2. Has Lan learnt – has learnt
3. Did you wear – hasn’t worn
4. Does your mother read – watches
<b>Question 2: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm</b>


1. It’s in the South Pacific
2. Yes, it is


3. It has nearly four million
4. No, they don’t.


<b>Question 3: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm-6B, 0,25đ – 6A</b>
<b>1.</b> He lives with his grandparents on Hoang Quoc Viet Street.


<b>2.</b> My brother is the tallest person in my family.


<b>3.</b> He lives very far from his office.


<b>4.</b> Who did you play badminton with yesterday ?
<b>Question 4: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm </b>
1. The Nile river is the longest river in the world
2. Ba is shorter than Nam


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>
<b>Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION</b>
<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>


<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”</b>
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>


<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>


<b>Warmer (5'): Hang man</b>


- Cue: +What do you want to do first
when you go to a new school?


+ 8 letters


- Ask Ss to guess the letters one by one
and draw a line if they have each wrong
answer


-> Today we are going to learn how to
describe cities and landmarks


<b>I. Pre- speaking (15')</b>
<i><b>1. Teaching vocab</b></i>


- Teacher use different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, reality)


- Follow the five steps of teaching vocab.


- Guess each letter "LANDMARK"


- design (v):
- symbol (n):
- landmark (n):
- creature (n):
- heritage (n):



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

* Checking vocab: Magic wheel
<i><b>2. Activity</b></i>


<i>- Show the pitures of the five landmarks </i>
<i>and ask ss what they are. </i>


<i>- If they don’t know their English name, </i>
<i>give the English names and ask ss to </i>
<i>match them with the photos.</i>


<i>- Elicit from ss any information they </i>
<i>know about the landmarks: </i>


<i>Which countries and which cities are they</i>
<i>in ?</i>


<i>What type of building are they?</i>
<i>What were they built for?.... </i>
<b>II.While - speaking (20')</b>
<b>1. Exercise 2</b>


- Have ss read the five texts about the five
landmarks. Set a time limit


- Have them do the matching and ask
them to support their answers


<b>2. Exercise 3</b>


- Ask Ss to read the text again and allow


them a longer time limit


- Ask them to underline key words in each
text.


- Explain that key words are important
words that help us understand and
remember the main points of the text.
- Have ss do the T/F exercise individually,
then compare the answers with their
friends before discussing them as a class.
- Ask ss to support their answers


<b>III. Post- speaking (5')</b>


- Choose a country/ city/ landmark
yourself.


- Ask the class to guess what it is.


- Arrange groups of four to play the game.
- Each group then chooses the most


difficult city that they had to guess in their
group and presents it to the whole class as
a challenge.


<b>. Home work.</b>


- Summarize the main points of the lesson.



- Listen and answer
- work individually
<i>Key:</i>


a. Merlion b. Big ben
c. Temple of literature
d. Sydney opere House\
e. Eiffel Tower


<i>Key:</i>
1. Big Ben


2. Sydney opere House
3. Temple of literature
4. Eiffel Tower


5. Merlion


KEY:
1. F
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. F
6. F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<b>Week : 26</b> Preparing date: 17/2/2014
<b>Period : 75</b> Teaching date:



<b>UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>
<b>Lesson 5: SKILL 1</b>


<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>
<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”</b>
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
- Read for specific and general information in texts, including postcards.
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>


<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warm-Up (5’)</b>


- Show The Class Some Real Postcards.
- Ask Ss Where The Postcards Were Sent
From.


- Ask Them To Guess Who Wrote The
Postcard And To Whom, Where Was It


Written, What Was It Written About...
<b>I. Pre - Reading (10): </b>


<b>1. Look At The Postcards</b>


- Discuss The Featutes Of The Postcards
With Ss: Photo On One Side, Short Text On
The Other Side, Can Be Sent Without
Envelope,...


- Draw Ss’attention To The Postcard. Ask
Them The Three Questions. Accept


Reasonable Answers.


<b>Ii. While - Reading (20')</b>


<b>1. Read The Postcard And Answer The </b>
<b>Questions.</b>


- Have Ss Look At The Questions First.
- Ask Them To Underline The Key Words
In The Questions. Tell Them These Key


<b>-</b> Answer The Questions


Key:


1. The Photo Is Of Stockholm,
Sweden



2. The Sender Writes About His/ Her
Stay In The City.


3. We Sent Postcards To Tell Our
Family And Friends That We Are
Having A Good Time, But We Still
Miss Them And Want To Send Some
Photos Of The Place Where We Are
So That, Although They Cannot
Bewith Us There They Can Still See
How Beautiful It Is.


Key:


1. Mai Is In Stockholm.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

Words Will Help Them To Find The
Information More Easily In The Text.
- Have Them Read The Postcard And
Answer The Questions Individually Then
Compare The Answers With Each Other
Before Discussing Them As A Class.
- Encourage Ss To Support Their Answers,
Especially Numbers 6 And 8.


<b>2. Match The Headings With The </b>
<b>Numbers.</b>


- Have Ss Read The Text Again, This Time


To Match The Headings.


- Then Call Their Attention To How A
Postcard Is Organized.


<b>III. Post- Reading (10’)</b>


- Ss can choose one of the cities they have
learnt about in this unit, or choose a city
that they like in Vietnam.


- Ask ss to imagine they have just arrived in
that cityand want to tell others about it.
- Ask them to work individually answering
the questions in the form of notes, but not in
full sentences.


- Using notes, have ss work in pairs and tell
each other about the city they choose. Make
sure they speak in full sentences now. Then
have them join another pair to make groups
of four and continue their discussions.
<b>Homework:</b>


- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the
lesson and prepare skills 2.


Sunny.


4. Mai is staying in a holtel.



5. She has invited the Royal Palace
and had ‘fika’ in a cafe in the Old
town.


6. Fika means a leisure break when
one drinks tea/ coffee and perhaps has
some biscuits with friends and family
7. She will cycle to discover the city.
8. Mai is feeling happy. She used the
words such as “ fantastic, perfect,
amazing, too beautiful for words”
Key:


1. i 2. c 3. h 4.b


5. d 6. g 7. f 8. e 9. a


- Follow T’s instruction


<b>Week : 27</b> Preparing date: 20/2/2014


<b>Period : 76</b> Teaching date:
<b>UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>


<b>Lesson 6: SKILL 2</b>
<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>


<b>1. Knowledge:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Write a holiday postcard


+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>


<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> St: Textbook, sts' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>Warmer (5'): Whisper To A Yell</b>


- Divide The Class Into 2 Groups


- Whisper The Words One By One To Two
Ss From Two Groups


- The Two Ss Whisper To The Others, The
Last One Will Yell The Word


- Which Team Yells The Word First And
Correctly Will Have One Point.


- The Team Has More Point Will Be The
Winner



<b>I. Listening (15’)</b>


<b>1. Pre- Listening: Look At The Pictures. </b>
<b>What Do You See?</b>


<b>- Ask Ss What They See In The Photos First.</b>
- Ask Ss If They Know About Nobel Prize.
- Tell Ss They Will Listen About The Old
Town In Stockholm, And How Nobel Prizes
Are Awarded Every Year In Stockholm.
<b>2. While – Listening</b>


<b>2.1: Listen And Write T Or F</b>


- Before Listening To The Recording, Go
Through The Statements With Ss. Explain
Any New Words.


- Ask Ss To Underline The Most Important
Information In Each Sentence.


- Tell Ss They Need To Listen For The Main
Ideas They Hear. Play The Recording As
Many Time As Ss Wish.


<b>2.2: Listen Again To The Talk And Fill In </b>
<b>The Gaps</b>


- Expalin To Ss That This Time They Need


To Listen For The Exact Details In The
Recording.


- Ask Them To Identify The Kind Of


Words:


1. Royal Palace
2. Nobel Prize
3. museum
4. cafes
5. restaurants
6. islands


Key:
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. F
5. F


Key:
1. 14
2. 700
3. 3,000


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

Information They Have To Find Out: Years,
Amount Of Money, Number Of People,
Date, Etc.



- Play The Recording For Ss To Fill In The
Gaps.


<b>3. Post- Listening</b>


- Ask Ss To Work In Groups Of Four To
Summarize The Recording They Heard.
- Call Some Ss To Talk In Front Of The
Class.


<b>II. Writing: A holiday postcard (20’)</b>
<b>1. Pre- Writing</b>


- Write 5 Ws And 1 H On The Board And
Ask Ss To Give Examples.


- Draw Their Attention To The Postcard In 2
Page 28. Ask Ss How The 5 Ws And 1 H
Are Answered In The Postcard.


- Have them make the questions in full and
find the information from the postcard that
gives the answers


<b>2. While – writing</b>


<b>2.1 Rearrange the words to make </b>
<b>sentences</b>


- Explain to ss that the space for writing on


postcards is not big so people often write
short sentences which contain the most
important information, and which can
express what they are feeling.


- Have ss rearrange the exclamations
<b>2.2 Write a postcard</b>


- Ask ss to use the notes they have made in
speaking 4 page 28 to write a postcard to
their family orfriends.


- Remind them how the 5ws and 1h are
included in the notes


<b>3. Post- writing</b>


- Pair ss and ask them to write postcards to
each other.


- Have them swap and give feedback on each
other’s writing once they have finished.
<b>HOMEWORK (5’)</b>


- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Assign home work.


5. 10 million


<b>-</b> work in groups of four to


summarize the recording


Key:


1. Stockholm ids fantastic
2. We’re in Da Lat!


3. We’re having a good time here!
4. I love Disneyland!


5. You must come!
6. I wish you were here!


<b>-</b> Write a postcard


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>Week : 27</b> Preparing date: 22/2/2014
<b>Period : 77</b> Teaching date:


<b>UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD</b>
<b>Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK</b>


<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>
<b>1. Knowledge:</b>


<b>- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”</b>
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /


+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
<b>2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.</b>



<b>3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>A. Warm-up: (5’) Lucky number</b>


<b>(Use ex1 to warm up)</b>


- Divide the class into 2 groups


- Each group in turn chooses one number
and answers the question


- With each right answer, they will have one
point. If they choose ‘lucky number’ they
will have one point without answering the
question.


- Which group has more points will win the
game


<b>B. NEW LESSON. (35’)</b>


<b>* Set the sence: You have revised </b>



<i>vocabulary related to the topic “ cities of the</i>
<i>words” , now we will revise the present </i>
<i>perfect</i>


<i><b>Exercise 2: Put the verbs in the prackets </b></i>
<i><b>into the present perfect.</b></i>


- Ask ss to complete the conversation
individually, then share answers with a
parner.


<i><b>Exercise 3: In pairs, complete this fact </b></i>
<i><b>sheet about Vietnam</b></i>


- Go through questions with ss. if they don’t


Key;
1. a,b
2. a,c
3. a,c
4. a,b
5. b,c


Key:


1. have you ever eaten
2. have you eaten
3. have been
4. have been



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

have any information about a particular
question, stop and give at least 3 answer
option for them to consider.


- After they have completed the fact sheet ,
have a whole class discussion about the
answers, as there could be several correct
answers.


<b>Exercise 4: Write a short paragrap</b>
- tell ss for a reference they can look at the
text about Britain on page 25 in Ss’ book
<b>COMMUNICATION</b>


- Try the first ‘ Have you ever..?’ question
on page 26 in s’s book with 2 ss as an
example.


- Ask the class who they think told the truth,
who didn’t, and why they think so.


- Have ss play the game in pair


- Ask some pairs to report what they have
found out about their partner.


<b>Finished!</b>


- Ask ss to use their results for the questions
in looking back to guide them as they



complete this self- assessment.


- Identify any difficulties and weak areas and
provide further practice.


<b>HOMEWORK. (5’)</b>


- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
<b>- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started – U10</b>


Key: (suggested)


Oldest university: Quoc Tu Giam,
Thang Long- Hanoi (1076)


Most popular Vietnamese writer:
Nguyen Du, Nam Cao


Most popular food: spring rolls,
noodles


Most popular drink: tea, coffee
Most common activity: watching tv,
football


- Write a short paragrap about
Vietnam


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<b>Week : 27</b> Preparing date: 22/2/2014


<b>Period : 78 + 79</b> Teaching date:


<b>REVIEW 3 (UNIT 7-8-9)</b>
<b>I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS</b>


<b>1. Knowledge:at the end of this lesson Ss can review all the knowledge what they have</b>
learnt in units 7-9


<b>2. Skill : reading, writing, listening and speaking.</b>
<b>II.PREPARATION.</b>


<b>-</b> T: Textbook, poster
<b>-</b> Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
<b>III. PROCEDURES:</b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students' activities</b>
<b>A. Warm-up: (5’) Lucky number</b>


<b>(Use ex1 to warm up)</b>


- Divide the class into 2 groups


- Each group in turn chooses one number and
answers the question


- With each right answer, they will have one point.
If they choose ‘lucky number’ they will have one
point without answering the question.


- Which group has more points will win the game


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<b>I. Language</b>
<b>1. Pnonunciation</b>


<b>Ex2: Practise saying the sentences. Pay </b>
<b>attention to the pronunciation of the </b>
<b>underlined words.</b>


<b>- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen carefully.</b>
- Play the recording again and ask them to repeat
the sentences.


- T checks on their pronunciation of the key
sounds.


<b>2. Vocabulary</b>


<b>Ex3: Choose A, B or C to fill the gaps in the </b>
<b>passage.</b>


- Ss do separately and share their answers later
with a partner.


- Check Ss’ answer.


Key:
1. C
2. A
3. A


4. B
5. D
6. D


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>Ex4: Choose one of the words/ phrases in the </b>
<b>box to complete sentences 1-6.</b>


- Ask ss to look at the whole sentence to decide
what kind of word is missing before referring to
the list of words given.


<b>3. GRAMMAR</b>


<b>Ex5: Complete the sentences with the present </b>
<b>simple, pp or past simple form of the verbs in </b>
<b>brackets.</b>


- This is a chance for ss to look back at the use of
the verb tenses. Focus on the difference between
the p.s and p.p


<b>Ex 6: Are the underlined question words </b>
<b>correct? If not, correct them.</b>


- Ss must by now be familiar with, and quite
skillful in, using question words. If the question
word is wrong, ask ss to explain why.


<b>Ex7: Use the superlatives in the box to </b>
<b>complete the sentences.</b>



- This look back at the use of superlatives with
long adjectives. Check Ss’ answers.


<b>4. Everyday English</b>


<b>Ex8: Choose the best replies for the questions. </b>
- This create a situation in which one can use the
language already learnt, in daily conversation.
<b>II. SKILLS</b>


<b>Reading</b>
<b>Ex1+2:</b>


- Ss do this exercise individually, and then check
it with their peers.


- Let ss discuss among themselves before
finalizing the answers.


Speaking


<b>Ex3: Work in groups. Interview your friends </b>
<b>about their likes. Takes notes in the table and </b>
<b>report it to your class? </b>


- This, again, revises the language items learnt but
in a more dynamic form: interviewing and


reporting the results


<b>Listening</b>


<b>Ex4: Listen to the interview with Nick and fill </b>
<b>in the blanks.</b>


- This listening aims at revision of present oerfect


Key:


1. Paris 2. Football
3. Local Television


4. Country 5. Remote
Control


6. Summer Sports
Key:


1. started 2. play
3. had 4. is
5. bought 6. has
worked


Key:


1. What 2. When
3. Cotrrect 4. How tall
5. Correct


Key:



1. the most expensive
2. the most popular
3. the most interesting
4. the most colourful
5. the most dangerous
Key:


1.e 2.a 3.c 4.b 5.d


Key:


Ex1: 1.B 2. A
Ex2:


1. Who’s faster
2. putting your toes


together
3. Who’s faster
4. Putting your toes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

tense. Play the recording and let ss write down the
answers.


<b>Ex5: Listen to an interview with Phong and </b>
<b>complete the answers with information from </b>
<b>the listening.</b>


- This listening requires ss to listen more


attentively for specific information.


- Ask ss to read the questions first and determine
what information is needed for the answer


- Then, T plays the recording.
Writing


<b>6. Mark and Tim visited India last summer. </b>
<b>Look at the information in the table to write a </b>
<b>complete passage about their visit</b>


- Ask ss to read the table and decide what tense/
sentence structure to use for the writing and how
the information is organized. Only then should T
let ss write.


- Ss might want to change some details from the
table. Encourage them to do so.


They can start with:


Last summer, Tim and mark visited india. They...


Key:


1. competition
2. skiing
3. country
4. canada


5. cartoon
Key:


1. running race
2. Thailand
3. Wait and see


<b> <sub> UNIT 7: Television</sub></b>


<b>Lesson 1: Getting started</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to televosion.
<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>


- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>I. Class organization.</b>
- Greeting.


- Checking attendance:
<b>IV.New lesson.</b>


<b>Sts’ and T’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T writes the word “ Television” on board
and asks Ss to give any ideas/ vocabulary


they know relating to the topics.


<b>2. Presentation</b>


- Pre teach some new words.


- Set the scence: What are you expecting to


- I can watch many cartoons on it.
- It helps to cheer me up…


<b>1. Vocabulary.</b>


- favourite programme:
- channel:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

hear. Ask ss: What will they talk about?
- Getting started.


<b>3. Practice</b>


a- Ss work individually. Allow them to
share their answers with their partners
before discussing as a class.


b- This task focuses on the use of adjectives
to describe the programme. Let Ss look for
the adjectives from the conversation.


c- Supplement the list of adjectives with


words drawn from Ss experiences.


<b>4. Further practice</b>


Ex2: Ask Ss to do the matching


- Go round and check if they match the
pictures and the words correctly.


- Show Ss how to pronounce each word by
saying it and ask Ss to repeat.


Ex3: Ss have to read the sentences carefully
and decide which word is the right one. T
can guide them to some clues like “ It
makes me laugh” “ Disney…


Ex4: eg: There are not enough programmes
for children or I can watch many films…


<b>2. Getting started.</b>
What’s on today?


a. Read the conversation again and answer
<i>the questions.</i>


Key:


1. Laughing out Loud.
2. VTV3.



3. No, they aren’t.
4. Because he is awful.
5. Tom is stupid, but funny


b. Find the adjectives describing each
<i>character in the conversation and write </i>
<i>them here.</i>


Key: Mr. Bean : funny, awful
Tom: stupid, funny
Jerry: intelligent.


c. Which adjective(s) below can you use to
<i>describe a TV programme you have </i>


<i>watched? What programme is it?</i>
Possible answers:


Yes: popular, historical, serious, long,
educational, boring, funny, good,
entertaining, live.


No: beautiful, small
<b>3. Practice</b>


-Ex2: Put the correct word in the box under
<i>each picture.</i>


Key:



1. national television
2. news programme
3. local television
4. comedy


5. game show


6. animal programme


Ex3: Use suitable words to complete the
<i>sentences.</i>


Key: 1. national
2. comedy
3. channels
4. competition
5. Cartoons.
6. educational


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>5. Homework.</b>


- Learn new words by heart
- Do exercise 1,2 in work book
- Prepare: A closer look 1


<i>about it.</i>


eg: There are not enough programmes for
children or I can watch many films…



<b>* Adjustment:</b>


………
………


………
………


………
………


Date of planning: 1/1/2014
Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2014
<b>Period 58 UNIT 7: Television</b>


<b>Lesson 2: A closer look 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce the sound /θ/, /ð/ correctly in
isolation and in context . Use the lexical items related to television.


<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>I. Class organization.</b>
- Greeting.


- Checking attendance:


<b>II. New lesson.</b>


<b>Sts’ and T’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


Chatting: Which is your favourite TV
programme?


Which MC do you like best?
<b>2. Presentation</b>


1. Vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

- Teach vocabulary


Ex1. Ask Ss to work in group of three.
When Ss completed their work, T play the
recording to check their answers as well as
to practise the pronunciation of the new
words.


3. Practice


Ex2: Revise the vocabulary learnt in both
Getting started and Activity 1. Ss learn to
identify a word from its description.


Ex3: Ss can refer to 2 and the suggestd
structures in 3 to see how a word is defined.


T writes some prompts on the board so that
Ss can imitate.


Eg: In this programme, people…
A person who….


4. Further practice.


Ask Ss to practise the sounds /θ/, /ð/


Ex4: Ask Ss to listen carefully to the words
T talks about the differences between two
sounds.


Ex5: Ask Ss to write the words in the two
appropriate boxes. Check if they do it
correctly.


Ex6: Tongue Twisters


Allow Ss to practise reading the tongue
twisters among themseves.


<b>5. Homework.</b>


- Learn vacabulary by heart
- Do exercise in work book
- Prepare: A closer look 2


<i>under the pictures.</i>


Key:


1. newsreader
2. TV schedule
3. MC


4. viewer


5. remote control
6. weatherman


Ex2: Choose a word from the box for each
<i>description below.</i>


Key:


1. Weatherman
2. newreader
3. remote control
4. MC


5. volume button
6. TV viewer.
EX3: Game


1. Newreader: A person who reads
news.


2. weatherman: a man who gives a
weather forecast.



3. comedian: a person whose job is to
make people laugh by telling jokes
and funny stories.


2. Pronunciation


Ex4: Listen and repeat words.


<i>Ex5: Which words in Ex4 have /θ/and </i>
<i>which have /ð/. Listen again and write them in </i>
the correct column.


/θ/ /ð/
theater
Thanksgiving
earth
anything
both
through
there
them
neither
weatherman
than
feather
<i>Ex6: Tongue Twisters</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>* Adjustment:</b>



……….
………


……….
………


……….
………


Date of planning: 14/1/2014
Date of teaching: 21/1/2014
<b>Period 64</b>


<b>UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b> Lesson 1: Getting started</b>


<b>A. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to the lexical items related to the topic "sports
and games" and use the combinations: go, play, do + N/Ving.


- Vocabulary: lexical items related to sports and games.
- Go, play, do + N/Ving


<b>II</b>


<b> . Preparation:</b>


- Pictures, worksheets, a CD & a cassette player.
<b>III. Procedures:</b>



<b>A. Organization</b>


<b> - Checking attendance</b>
<b>B. New lesson</b>


<b>Students and teacher’s activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm up </b>


<b>* Chatting: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

time?


? Do you play sports?
? What sports do you do?
? How often do you do it?
T leads Ss to the lesson.
<b>2. Presentation</b>


<i><b>I. Vocabulary.</b></i>
- Teacher use different techniques


to teach vocab (situation, realia,
examples…..)


- Follow the seven steps of teaching
vacab.


* Checking vocab: Rub-out and
remember.



- Copy all the words


T: lets ss listen and repeat the
words in activity 2




Do boxing: tập quyền anh
Do aerobics: tập e- rô- bic
Do karate: tập ka- ra- te
Play chess: chơi cờ vua


Play table tennis: chơi bóng bàn
Play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền
Go skiing: đi trượt tuyết


Go cycling: đi đạp xe
Outdoor (adj): ngoài trời


Outdoors (adv), (n): khu vực bên ngoài
Breaktime (n): nghỉ giải lao


<b>3. Practice</b>


T: lets ss name the sports and
games in Activity 3 individually
first, then compare their answer
with a parter



<b>II. Practice</b>
Activity 3:
1. cycling
2. table tennis
3. running
4. swimming
5. chess
6. skiing
T: explains the difference between


“ a sport” and “a game”.


A sport: an activity that you do for
pleasure and that need physical
exercise.


A game: an activty or sport with
rules in which people or team
compete against each other.
T: shows the picture in activity 1.
? Who do you see in the picture?
? Where are they?


? What do you think they are
talking about?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

? What sports can Duong do?
? Is Mai good at sports?


Ss: Duong can do karate and play


table tennis.


No, she isn’t.


T: asks ss roleplay the dialogue
then calls 2 pairs to perform it.
T: lets ss play the game Lucky
Number to answer the questions 1.a


T: allows ss to discuss in groups to
find the meanings of the expression
in 1.b in the conversation.


T: lets ss practice the sample
dialogue in 1.c then asks them to
make a similar conversation.


<b>Activity 1</b>


a. 1. Duong can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is going to learn karate.


3. Because the equipment there is modern and
the people are friendly.


4. Duong played with Duy and won(for the first
time)


5. At the Karate club.



b. 1. Wow: used to express surprise.


2. Congratulations: used to congratulate sb/ to
tell that you are please about their success.
3. Great: use to show admiration


4. See you: used when you say goodbye.
<b>4. Production.</b>


T: asks ss to do the activity 4 in
pairs in 3 minutes


T: lets ss do activity 5 individually
in 3 minutes


T: asks ss to conduct a survey (ask
2 friends to complete the survey
then report the survey and give
comment on how sporty your friend
is.)


<i><b>Activity 4</b></i>


<i><b>Play: chess, table tennis, volley</b></i>
<i><b>Do:boxing, aerobics, karate</b></i>


<i><b>Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running, skiing</b></i>
<b>Activity 5:</b>


1. do



2. is watching
3. goes


4. likes
5. played


<b>Questions</b> <b>Answers</b> <b>ss’s </b>
<b>answe</b>
<b>r</b>


<b>ss’s </b>
<b>answe</b>
<b>r</b>
1. Can you


swim?


A. Yes
B. No
2. Do you play


outdoors
everyday?


A. Yes
B. No
3. Do you get


up early and



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

do morning
exercise?
4. What do
you do at
breaktime at
school?


A. Play in
the school
yard.


B. Sit in the
classroom.
5. What do


you think of
sports/ games?


A. very
good/ useful
A. A waste
of time.
<b>5. Homework </b>


Learn by heart all the new words.
Do Ex in workbook


Prepare for: A Closer Look 1
<b>* Adjustment:</b>



………
………
***************************************************************************
********


Date of planning: 12/1/2013
Date of teaching: 22/1/2013
<b>Period: 65</b>


<b> UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce correct the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/
correctly in isolation and in context; and enrich their vocabulary related to sports items.
- Develop listening skill, reading skill and pronunciation.


- Vocabulary: sports items
- Pronunciation: /eə/ and /ɪə/
<b>II</b>


<b> . Preparation:</b>


- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, a CD & a cassette player
<b>III. Procedures:</b>


<b>Sts’ and T’s activities</b> <b>Content</b>



<b>1. Warm- up </b>
* Bingo:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

games.


T: reads: tennis, table tennis, soccer, football,
volleyball, running, fishing, cycling, skiing,
karate, swimming, chess, aerobics, skipping
ropes, badminton…


T: leads in the lesson


<b> </b>


<b>I. Vocabulary.</b>
<b>2. Presentation </b>


<i><b>. Teaching vocab</b></i>


- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia)


* Checking vocab: write the words under the
picture Activity 2


Sports
shoes


(n) Giày thể thao



Boat (n) Thuyền


Skateboard (n) Ván trượt
Goggles (n) Kính bơi, kính


bảo hộ
Racket (n) Vợt cầu lông
Skis (n) Ván trượt tuyết
Racquet (n) Vợt bóng bàn,


tennis
<b>II. Practice</b>


<b>Activity 2</b>


1. A bicycle 2. A ball
3. Sports shoes 4. Skis
5. A boat 6. A racket
7. A skateboard 8. Goggles
<b>3. Practice </b>


T: tells ss to do the task independently first.
Calls some ss to write their answers on the
board, then check their answers as a class.


<b>Activity 3</b>


1. c 4. e 7. b
2. d 5. g 8. f
3. a 6. h



T: explains how to form the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/
together. Asks ss to observe teacher for the
correct pronunciation of the two sounds.
T: plays the CD 3 times and lets ss listen and
reapeat. Calls some ss to read aloud.


T: allows ss to do act 5 individually in 4 mins.
Calls 2 ss to write their answers on the board.
T: checks their answers as a class through the
game: Tasks the ss to touch their ear if they hear
/ɪə/ sound, touch their hair if they hear /eə/
sound, stay still if they don’t hear these two
sounds while teacher is saying the word aloud.


<b>Activity 5</b>


1. A 2. C
3. B 4. A
5. B


6. A
<b>4. Production </b>


*Game: Ping Pong


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

of the words with /eə/ sound. Team 2 thinks of
the words with /ɪə/ sound. One member of team
1 says aloud a word with /eə/ sound.



Immediately another member in team 2 says
aloud a word with /ɪə/ sound.


<b>5. Homework </b>


Learn by heart all the new words.


Do Ex A1,2 P10, B1,2 ,3 P10,11 (SBT)
Prepare for next ; Closer Look 2
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


……….
……….
……….


*************************************************


Date of planning: 3 /2 /2014
Date of teaching: 10/ 2 /2014
<b>Period 66</b>


<b>UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:


- Use the past simple; and imperatives to tell sb to do sth
- Grammar: - Past simple tense



- Imperative
<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Visual aids: pictures.


- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
<b>III. Procedures:</b>


<b>Sts and T’s activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm- up</b>


* Question and answer:


? What did you do last Sunday?
T: leads in the past simple tense.
<b>2. Presentation </b>


<i><b> Teaching grammar.</b></i>


T: writes the teacher’s question in


<b>warm-I. Grammar:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

up stage ans some Ss’answers on the
board.


T: asks to look at the examples to draw
the rules, the usage, and the form.



A: What did you do last Sunday?


B: I stayed at home. I did my homework..
<b>b. Usage:</b>


We use the past simple tense to talk about
a finished action in the past. We often say
when it happened.


<b>c. Form (Textbook)</b>
Iregular verbs:


Be- was/ were Have- had
Win- won Eat- ate
Go- went Do- did
<b>d. Notes</b>


Adverbs of time are used with the past
simple are: yesterday, 2 weeks/ 3
months… ago, last week/ month/ year/
Sunday…., in 2012/ 2011…


T: reminds ss of some imperative
sentences normally used in the class.
T: lets look at the examples to draw the
usage the form.


<b>3. Practice </b>



T: lets ss work in pairs to give the


answers for Activity 1. Teacher observes,
helps when necessary and correct ss’
mistakes.


T: lets ss do Activity 2 individually.
Teacher calls on 2 students to write their
answer on the board. Teacher corrects
their answers and gives explanation if
necessary.


T: calls 2 pairs to read the dialogue with
the correct verb forms.


T: lets ss do Activity 4 individually then
allows them to compare their answers
with their friends.


T: asks ss to work in groups of 4, take
turns telling their friends what to do or


<b>2. Imperatives</b>


We use imperative to tell someone to do
something or to give a direct order.
Eg: Sit down (please).


Open your books.



Don’t be late for school.
<b>II. Practice</b>


<b>Activity 1: </b>


1. were 2. was


3. was/ did/ was 4. Did/ were/ did/ was
<b>Activity 2:</b>


1. was 6. had
2. didn’t do 7. did
3. sat 8. visited
4. watched 9. ate
5. went 10. scored
<b>Activity 4:</b>


1. Take your umbrella


2. Please don’t litter. 3. Please hurry
up.


4. Don’t train too hard. 5. Put on your
coat.


<b>Activity 5:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

not to do at the gym. (Activity 5) Put on your trainers/ sports shoes.
Listen to the instructor carefully.
Don’t litter.



Don’t eat or drink at the gym.
<b>4. Production </b>


T: lets ss work in pairs asking and


answering about their last weekend. Calls
some ss to report their answers.


<b>5. Homework </b>


Do B4 P11, E1 P15 (SBT)
Prepare: Communication
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


………
………


*****************************************


Date of planning: 4 / 2 /2014
Date of teaching: 11 / 2 /2014
<b>Period 67</b>


<b> UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES</b>
<b>Lesson 4: Communication</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:



- Enrich their background knowledge about sports through a sports quiz, students can
also talk about their sports activities and talk about their favorite sportsman/ sportswoman.


- Speaking skill.
<b>II</b>


<b> . Preparation:</b>


- Visual aids: pictures.


- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
<b>III. Procedures:</b>


<b>Sts and T’s activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


T: shows the picture of 5 interlocked
rings


? What are they?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

of the world (Africa, the America,
Asia, Europe, and Oceania)


? What are the colors?


Ss: Blue, yellow, black, green, and red.
T: explains: every national flag in the


world has at least one of the five
colors.


T: leads in the lesson.
<b>2. Presentation</b>


<b>I. Vocabulary.</b>


* Preteach the vocab


* Checking teaching technique:
Rub-out and remember


Fit (adj): Khỏe mạnh


Ring (n): Vòng tròn


Marathon (n) Chạy ma ra tông


Achieve (v) Đạt được


Achievement (n) Thành tựu


hold (v) Tổ chức


<b>3. Practice.</b>


T: devides the class into two teams.
Each team takes turns to pick a small
piece of paper



Written down the questions in activity
1 to aswer. One score is given to one
correct answer


<b>II. Practice</b>
<b>Activity 1</b>


1. There are usually 22 players.(11 on each
side)


2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (devided into
two halves)


3. They are held every four years.


4. No, there weren’t Olympic Games in
2011. (They were held in 2004, 2008,
2012…..)


5. A marathon is.
<b>4. Production</b>


<b>5. Homework </b>


Learn by heart all the new words and
structures


Do exercises : C1,2 P12 (SBT)
Prepare for next.



<b>* Adjustment:</b>


………
………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

Date of planning: 8 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 15 / 2 / 2014
<b>Period 68 UNIT 8 : Sport and games</b>


<b> Lesson 5: Skill 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about famous
sportspeople. Talk about the activities/ sports/ games they do in their apare time.


<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>Sts’ and T’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Can you give me names of some famous
football players in Viet Nam?


- Of whom you are his fan?
<b>2. Activity</b>



Reading


a, Pre- reading


- Work in pairs to discuss the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give their ideas.


b, While reading


- Tell Ss to read the passage quickly and
check their ideas. Allow them to read in 5
minutes.


- Ask Ss to read the passage again, then
answer the questions.


- T read aloud while they track the text with


- Huynh Duc, Hong Son….
- Hong Son is my fan


Reading


1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions.
1. Do you know Pele. The King of
Football? What is special about him?
2. Where does he come from?


3. What other things do you know about
him?



2. Read the text quicky to check your ideas
in 1.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

their fingers.
c, Post reading


- Let Ss talk about Pele


- Refer to other famous football players
they know and ask them who they think the
best football player they know and ask them
who they think the best football player is.
Speaking


a, Pre – speaking
Exercise 4:


- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick
the right column.


- T refer to people in Viet Nam in general,
asking them why they usually or never play
or do this or that.


b, While – speaking
Exercise 5:


Let Ss work in groups asking and



answering questions. ( They should refer to
the table in 4)


Exercise 6: Divide the class into groups of 4
or 5. Let them discuss their answers to the
questions. When finish, T asks one S from
each group “ What is the most interesting
thing you learnt from your discussion?
c, Post – speaking


In pairs, one S is an interviewer and other is
a famous sportsperson. Ss role-play an
interview. T and Ss can brainstorm possible
interview questions before the activity.
<b>3. Homework.</b>


- Learn adjectives


- Do exercise in work book
- Prepare: Skill 2


1. Pele was born on 21st<sub> October 1940.</sub>
2. People called him “ The King of


Football” because he is such a good
football player.


3. He became Football Player of the
Century in 1999.



4. He scored 1, 281 goals in total.
5. Yes, he is.


Speaking


4. How often do you go/do/play these
sports/games? Tick the right column.


5. Work in groups. What kind of sports/
games do you do most often? Why?
6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the
following questions.


1. Do you like football?


2. Do you play football or only watch it?
3. What other sports do you play?


- Do you play them well?


- When and how often do you play them?
4. Do you belong to any clubs?


5. If you don’t play sport(s), what do you
often do in your spare time?


<b>* Adjustment:</b>


………
………



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

Date of planning: 10 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 17 / 2 / 2014
<b>Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games</b>


<b>Lesson 6: Skill 2</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about the sports/
games people play.


<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>I. Class organization.</b>
- Greeting.


- Checking attendance:
<b>II. New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the
brochure in skills 1


<b>2. Presentation.</b>



<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday
destination


- Play the recording for the answer.


<i> </i>


<i> -Ask Ss to recall the two places in the </i>
brochure in skills 1


HL Bay and Hue


<b>1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s </b>
<b>.They want to go on holiday.They are </b>
<b>choosing a place from the brochure </b>
<b>above .which place do they choose?</b>
- Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place </b>
<b>you know </b>


- Ask some questions to prepare the class
for the activity



<b>4. Production.</b>


- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen
places


-Check their ideas at the end


<b>5. Home work.</b>


- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.


<b>2. Listen again and answer the following </b>
<b>questions.</b>


1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang


2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?


3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.


4- Yes, he is
WRITING


<b>3. Write a travel guide about a place you </b>
<b>know </b>



- Do you have picture or can you draw a
map of the place?


- What natural wonders are there?


- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?


- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


<b>4. In notes , fill each blank in the </b>
<b>network with the inforation about the </b>
<b>place.Then use these notes to write a </b>
<b>short paragraph about it.</b>


1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?


3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?


5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?


<b>Adjustment:</b>


...
...


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

Ngày soạn : 13/ 2/ 2014


Ngày dạy: 18/ 2/ 2014
<b>Period 70: Unit 8 : Sports and games</b>


<b> Lesson 7: Looking back and project</b>
I. TEACHING POINTS:


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.


- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their favourite sport or games.


* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS


<b>Teacher and Students' activities</b> <b>Contents and Board</b>
-Decribe in your favourite


I. WARM-UP.
Group of four
- Tell Ss to write the words in their


notebooks individually and then check with
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let
them repeat the words. Check their



pronounciation.


_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and
complete them with the adjectives they have
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the


words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually
first. then they can check their answers with
a partner before discussing the answers as a


II. NEW LESSON:
<b>A Vocabulary:</b>


1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
picture.


KEY 1. foootball 2.badminton 3.
swimming .


2. Activity 2
KEY


1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.


<b>B. Grammar </b>



 <b>Activity 3 KEY</b>


one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast


hot
large


happy
noisy
quiet


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of
their original answers so they can


use that information in their Now you
can...statements.


-T elicits the language being practiced in this
activity


-Ss read the questions and answer once or
twice( they read them aloud). Then match
them. If there is time, have them write their
notebooks.


- Ss work in pair and role play the questions
and answers .



Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak
areas and provide further practice.


heavy difficult
polluted
 <b>Activity 4 KEY</b>


adj comparative form


fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting


 <b>Activity 5 KEY</b>


1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than


4 more beautiful than


5 more expensive than


<b>C. Communication </b>
:*Activity 6.


KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
<b>:</b>*Activity 7.


Finished! Now you can..
. name places


. give directions
.use adjective to
describe places.
.compare things
-T ask ss look at the picture of two


neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the
tipical features of them.


- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their
imagination.( if have time)



D. Project


What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhood.


2. write a description of it.
- where it is / what it has


- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.


<b>III. HOMEWORK.</b>
-Learn the new words.


- Talk about sports and games.
-Make a description.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

...
...


Ngày soạn : 17/ 2/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 22/ 2/ 2014
<b>Period 71: Unit 9: Sports and games</b>


<b> Lesson 1: Getting started</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the Sports and games


+/ Making and


+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.


-Before Ss open their books, review the
previous Unit focus on the key language
and structures learnt.


- Write the unit title on the board


“geography club ” explain the meaning of
surprise and asks Ss to guess what the
picture might be about . Let Ss open their
books and check their answers.



<b>2. Presentation.</b>


- T can also Ss to share any recent
experiences of going on a picnic.
Play the recording


ss listen and read.
<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation
to find the phrases


- Practice saying them together


- Pay attention to intonation when asking
questions


- Ask pairs to role-play the short


conversations before demonstrating for


<i> </i>


<i> Ask Ss questions about the picture</i>
eg: How many people are there?
What are they doing?


<b>1. Listen and read.</b>
*/ New words.


- tennis


- soccer
- go skiing
- cycling


<b>a Answer the following questions</b>
1- Vy is


2- She went to the wrong room
3- Uluru


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

the class


- Demonstrate the game to the class first.


- Ask Ss label the pictures.


- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1
again . tick the words you can find.
<b>4. Production.</b>


-Guide the way to do .


- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.


<b>5. Home work.</b>



- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.


<b>b.Classroomlanguage </b>
1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?


<b>c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople </b>
<b>use these sentences.Then role-play the</b>
<b>situations with a partner.</b>


<b>2. Listen and repeat the following </b>
<b>words</b>


1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley


<b>3. Now label the pictures.</b>


1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach


9- island 10- valley


<b>4. Read the conversation in 1 again . </b>
<b>tick the words you can find.</b>



<b>* Adjustment:</b>


………
………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

Date of planning: 11 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 18 / 2 / 2014
<b>Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games</b>


<b>Lesson 7: Looking back and Project.</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocabulary, grammar, communication
and understanding about some traditional games in project.


<b>II. Teaching aids:</b>
- Sub-board.


<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>I. Class organization.</b>
- Greeting.


- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.


<b>Sts’ and T’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>



Ask Ss to look at the pictures


- What is the name of the sport in each
picture?


- Which is your favorite sport?
<b>2. Activity</b>


<i><b>a- Activity 1: Vocabulary</b></i>


Ex 1- Ss do this task individually. T
corrects their mistakes and lets them read
the words correcly.


Ex 2- Let Ss repeat the words. Check their
pronunciation. Tell Ss to write the answers
in their notebooks. Then T corrects the
mistakes.


<i><b>b- Activity 2: Grammar</b></i>


Ex3: Have Ss write their answers in their
notebooks. T checks their answers.


Ex4: Ss work in pairs or groups to finish or
write the sentences. T gives correction.
Ex5: Ss do the task individually first. Then
they can check their answers with a partner



<b>* Vocabulary</b>


<i>1. Find one odd word or prase in each line.</i>
Key: 1. C 2.A 3. D 4. C 5. B


<i>2. Read the four words in each line. Write </i>
<i>the name of the game or sport the four </i>
<i>words belong to</i>


Key:
1- cycling
2- football
3- boxing
4- table tennis
5. basketball
<b>* Grammar</b>


<i>3. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct </i>
<i>form.</i>


Key: 1. are 2. took 3. started 4. are playing
4. did you do- cycled – watched


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

before discussing the answers as a class. T
gives corrections. Have some Ss read the
whole passage aloud. The rest of the class
should track the text with their fingers as
the other Ss read.


<i><b>c- Activity 3: Communication</b></i>



Ex6: Ss read the questions and answers
once or twice. Then match them.


- Ss work in pairs and role- play the
questions and answers.


- Ss write all sentences in their
notebooks if have enough time.
* Finished!


Ask ss to complete the self-assessment.
Identify any difficulties/ weak areas and
provide further practice as needed.


<b>3. Project </b>


Ex1: - Have Ss read the passage carefully.
Explain new words and anything difficult
for Ss. Make sure they understand


everything throughly.


Ex2: Let Ss work in groups. Each group
chooses a game or sport. Let them talk, then
write a bout it.


<b>4. Homework</b>


- Review vocabulary, grammar…


- Do exercises in workbook.
- Prepare: Unit 9 – Getting started


1. Please stop making noise


2. Go out to play with your friends.
3. Don’t feed the animals


4. Stand in a line, boys!
5. Don’t tease the dog.


<i>5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish </i>
<i>the passage.</i>


Key:


1. play 2. hear 3. games 4. sports 5. famous
<b>* Communication</b>


<i>6. Match the questions in A with their </i>
<i>correct answers in B.</i>


Key: 1. a 2. e 3. b 4. c 5. d


Finished! Now you can <sub>  </sub>

* talk about sports and


games



* talk about things that
happened in the past
* tell someone to do
s.thing or give an order.
<b>* Project</b>


<i>1- Read the passage about the game “ </i>
<i>Blind man bluff”</i>


What you need: A blindfold, an open space
and 5 players or more.


1. Stand in a circle, pick one….
2. He/ She has to try and touch the


others. the other players should try….
3. When the seeker catches…


4. When the seeker guesses the other’s
name…


<i>2- Choose one of the following sports/ </i>
<i>games ( or one of your own) and write </i>
<i>about it.</i>


- Tug of war ( rope pulling)
- Skipping


- Marbles
<b>* Adjustment:</b>



………
………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

Ngày soạn : 16/ 2/ 2014


Ngày dạy: 22/ 2/ 2014
<b>Period 71: Unit 9: Cities of the world</b>


<b>Lesson 1: Getting Started </b>
I. Teaching points:


- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about cities of the world, review vocabs about
continients, countries, cities and landmark.


- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
<b>II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.</b>


III. Teaching steps.


<b>Teacher and Students </b> <b>Board & contents</b>
<b>Warm up</b>


(Network)


-Have Ss work in 2 teams


-Get Ss to write down vocabs about TV
programmes.



-Give feed back and decide which is the
winner of the game.


-Provide some more vocabs about TV
programmes.


<b> A. WARM UP. (Network)</b>
<i> ruler</i>


-Present new words.


- Check: Rub out and Remember.


<b>B. NEW LESSON</b>
<b>* Vocabulary</b>
continients
Asia


Europe


South America
North America
<b>1. Listen and Read</b>


? Look at the picture.
What are they doing?
What are they watching?


- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to
answer the questions.



-Get them to read aloud the answers.
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.
-Give feed back.


- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to
find the adjectives.


<b>1.Listen & Read</b>


<b>2. *Answers: 1F, 2F,3T</b>

<b>b. *Answers: </b>


1.Asia
2. Europe
<b> ...</b>
<b>2. Putting.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud.


- Correct some.


-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the
poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask
qs to check Ss’ understanding of the poem.
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their
partner then read the poem aloud.



- Listen &correct


- Ask Ss to match the words with the TV
programmes


- Let ss listen and read.


- Explain some words if necessary.


<i><b>Example.</b></i>


1. national television
2. new programme


<b>3. Completing.</b>
Answer key:
1. national
2. comedy


- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the
things and say out the words, make up sentences
with the words if there is time.


-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their
vocabulary book.


<b>C. CONSOLIDATION</b>


<b>Homework</b>



-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
<b>* Adjustment:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

Ngày soạn : 17/ 2/ 2014


Ngày dạy: 24/ 2/ 2014
<b>Period 72: Unit 9: Cities of the world</b>


<b> Lesson 2: A closer look 1</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items


+/ Pronunciation /t/ and /st/


+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack


II. Preparation.


- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.


- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
<b>III. Procedure.</b>



<b>Teacher’s and students’activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Warm up. To introduce the new </b>


lesson.
-vocabulary
Travel items


- Discuss some of the placesin the
previous :


desert, mountain...


- Do I need a backpack in the desert?
- Why do you think so?


<b>2. Presentation.</b>
Ss listen and read.
<b>3. Practice.</b>


- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with
Ss.


- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
- Clicit ideas for sentense1.


- Then allow ss to complete the remaining
sentences.


-Check their ideas at the end.



- Remind ss that in the introduce they


<i> </i>


<i> - Bring some travel items</i>


ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack...


<b>1. Match theitems with the pictures then </b>
<b>practise saying the following items .</b>
*/ New words.


- plaster | ˈplɑːstə |
- painkillers | ˈpeɪnkɪlə |
- sun cream | sʌn kriːm |
- scissors | ˈsɪzəz |


- sleeping bag | ˈsliːpɪŋ bæɡ |
- backpack | ˈbækpæk |


<b>1. Match theitems with the pictures then </b>
<b>practise saying the following items .</b>
1- painkillers


2- scissors
3- plaster
4- sun cream
5- sleeping bag
6- walking boots


7- backpack
8- compass


</div>

<!--links-->

×